JP2017108829A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving fun of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute at least two of a first control mode where a putout rate becomes less than 1, a second control mode where the putout rate becomes 1, and a third control mode where the putout rate exceeds 1 by setting different passage part variation time for each control mode. When ball entry part variation time is set by referring to a ball entry part variation time table, the passage part variation time length is set by referring to a ball entry part variation time table, and a passage part variation time table stored as a set of tables.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 102

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, production, etc. for the purpose of improving the fun of gaming (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-172988 A

  In the gaming machines as described above, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the fun of games.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following forms.

[Form]
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state;
A payout means for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the entrance portion;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the entrance portion;
A lottery execution unit for the entrance part that executes the lottery for the entrance part based on the acquired special information;
The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for lottery by the lottery execution unit for the pitching part after the variation display is finished after starting the variation display of the identification information based on the execution of the lottery for the pitching part A lottery result display means for stopping the game,
A variation time setting means for entering the ball part for setting the length of the variation time for the ball part which is the time for the identification information to be displayed in a variable manner in the lottery result display means for the ball part,
A passing part through which game balls circulating in the game area can pass;
Passing portion lottery execution means for executing a passing portion lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passing portion;
The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the passage lottery execution means after the variation display is ended while starting the variation display of the identification information based on the game ball passing through the passage portion Passing section lottery result display means for stopping and displaying,
By setting the length of the passing portion variation time, which is the time for the identification information to be variably displayed in the passage portion lottery result display means, and after the passage portion variation time has elapsed, the passage portion lottery execution means Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the passing section lottery, thereby causing the ball entering section to transition from the first state to the second state;
A variation time table for a pitching portion in which the length of the variation time for the pitching portion is stored corresponding to the number of times of the lottery for pitching portion, and the number of times of performing the lottery for the pitching portion A table storage means for storing a passage time variation time table in which the length of the passage time variation is stored, as a set of tables;
With
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity is defined as a launch rate. If
The control means includes
A plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means can be executed,
By setting the length of the variation time for the passing portion to a different length for each control mode,
A first control mode in which the exit rate is less than 1,
A second control mode in which the ball exit rate is 1,
A third control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1;
At least two of the control aspects can be implemented;
When the pitch variation time setting means sets the length of the pitch variation time with reference to the pitch variation time table,
The gaming machine characterized in that the length of the passing portion variation time is set with reference to the passing portion variation time table and the passage portion variation time table stored as a set of tables.

  According to the said form, the interest improvement of a game can be aimed at.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine as one embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the various counters used for big hit lottery etc. It is explanatory drawing explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the allocation table set to the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a start port. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a display continuation time. It is explanatory drawing which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flowchart which shows a power combination opening / closing process. It is a block diagram which shows centering around the electrical structure of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a time chart which shows an example of the visual notice notice performed by the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image displayed on a symbol display apparatus, when a previous visual notice is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command response process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding command response process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows a confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pre-visibility notification. It is a flowchart which shows a previous notice notice generation | occurrence | production lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the production | presentation corresponding to a previous visual notice. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a time chart which shows an example which increases the number of the production | presentation elements of the same content performed multiple times with progress of time. It is a time chart which shows an example of the visual notice notice performed by the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the visual notice notice performed by the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining a display surface when the previous visual announcement is performed by the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the visual notice notice performed by the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the process performed in the main control apparatus and sound emission control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of the visual notice notice performed by the pachinko machine of 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects the button effect XA as an effect element for a visual notice notice, and performs the button effect XA twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production | generation aspect XA1, XA2 and the suggestion production F which are performed in button production XA. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process in case the button effect XA is performed as an effect element for a visual notice notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects the button effect XB as an effect element for an existing visual notice, and performs the button effect XB twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production | presentation aspect XB1, XB2, XB3 and the suggestion production F which are performed in the button production XB. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process in case the button effect XB is performed as an effect element for a visual notice notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects the button effect XC as an effect element for a visual notice, and performs the button effect XC twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of effect aspect XC1, XC2 and suggestion effect F which are performed in button effect XC. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process in case the button effect XC is performed as an effect element for a visual notice notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects the button effect XA as an effect element for a visual notice notice, and performs the button effect XD twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production | presentation selection screen XD1, the production | generation aspect XD2, and the suggestion production | presentation F which are performed in button production XD. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XD is performed as an effect element for a visual notice notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects the button effect XE as an effect element for an existing visual notice, and performs the button effect XE twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production | presentation selection screen XE1, the production | generation aspect XE2, and the suggestion production | presentation F which are performed in button production XE. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XE is performed as an effect element for a visual notice notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects the button effect XF as an effect element for an existing visual notice, and performs the button effect XF twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production | generation aspect XF1, XF2 and the suggestion production F which are performed in the button production XF. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when the button effect XF is performed as an effect element for a visual notice notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects the button effect XG as an effect element for a visual notice, and performs the button effect XA twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production | generation aspect XG1, XG2 and the suggestion production F which are performed in the button production XG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process in case the button effect XG is performed as an effect element for existing visual notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects the button effect XH as an effect element for an existing visual notice, and performs the button effect XH twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the production | presentation aspect XH1, XH2, XH3 and the suggestion production F which are performed in the button production XH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process in case the button effect XH is performed as an effect element for a visual notice notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game board of the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd start opening unit with which the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd start port unit in case the 1st high frequency support mode is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd start port unit in case the 2nd high frequency support mode is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for the start port performed with the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode performed with the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric power support performed with the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric utility opening / closing process performed with the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd start opening unit with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the locus | trajectory of a game ball in case a game ball enters into the 2nd starting port unit with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table in the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for starting ports performed with the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode performed with the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric utility opening / closing process performed with the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the other example of a structure of a 2nd start port unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a structure of a 2nd start port unit concretely. In the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd start opening unit at the time of winning a 1st type electric power opening. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of an opening-and-closing door at the time of winning a 1st type electric role opening while showing the timing when a game ball arrives at a through gate and an opening and closing entrance device. In the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing which shows the behavior of the 2nd start opening unit at the time of winning a 2nd type electric power opening. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of an opening-and-closing door at the time of winning a 2nd type electric role opening while showing the timing when a game ball arrived at a through gate and an opening and closing entrance device. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode performed with the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric power support performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric utility opening / closing process performed with the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the door in the 1st high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the door in the 2nd high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the door in the 3rd high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control aspect of the door in the low frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table in the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the allocation table in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of an opening-and-closing door when the fluctuation time of a usual unit is set to 0.95 second during the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of an opening-and-closing door when the fluctuation time of a usual unit is set to 0.25 second in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of an opening / closing door in case the fluctuation time of a usual unit is set to 0.05 second during the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation time table for high frequency support modes in the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the increase / decrease in the game ball of a player's hand in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
A2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
A3. Various processes executed in the main controller:
A4. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
A5. Previous visual notice:
A5-1. Overview of previous visual notice:
A5-2. Control related to previous visual notice:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment:
F. Sixth embodiment:
G. Seventh embodiment:
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. et al. Tenth embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. Twelfth embodiment:
M.M. Thirteenth embodiment:
N. Variations:
O. Regarding the invention group extracted from the above embodiments:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Game machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko machine”) as an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 that is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation using a dedicated key on the cylinder lock 17.

  An opened window portion 18 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The electrical decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light-emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by lighting or blinking at each game time, a big win winning, a reach occurrence or the like performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two plate glasses is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent out from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch between the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for a player to perform an input operation for a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button for stopping the game ball launching by the game ball launching mechanism by a pressing operation by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided for detecting the amount of dynamic operation based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the rotation operation amount. A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanism portions are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function for controlling the main game and a function for monitoring the power source. The main control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a symbol or an image for production.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When the instruction for launching the game ball is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 launches the game ball with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a slope that is gently inclined so that the game balls are connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and flow downstream. A tank rail 55 having a vertical position, a case rail 56 connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55 in the vertical direction, a supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a payout device 71, are provided.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is composed of plywood, and a game area GA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area GA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism is guided to the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area GA, and then flows down the game area GA. In the game area GA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30 and each accessory such as a windmill is arranged. These nails 42 and windmills distribute and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area GA.

  The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 includes a special map unit 37, a universal map unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As shown in the drawing, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The first start port 33 and the second start port 34 are both opened upward, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction so that the first start port 33 is above the second start port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the second starting port 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, the game ball can win a prize at the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when game balls win the second start port 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and the game balls that have not won the various winning ports are discharged from the game area GA through the out port 43.

  The through gate 35 includes a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical object opening lottery) with the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to an open state where the electric combination 34a is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second start port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area GA after winning the second It is possible to win a prize at the start port 34. In this embodiment, even if a game ball wins the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an open / close door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main controller 60, when the big win is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b repeats an open state in which a game ball can be won and the closed state. The opening / closing execution mode is shifted to a case where a big win is won as a result of a big win lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by winning at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the open / close door 36b is in an open state. This mode repeats the closed state. That is, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the first start port 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the winning at the jackpot 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning at the second starting port 34, even when the jackpot is won, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode in which the winning at the jackpot 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as winning balls.

  The special figure unit 37 includes a first result display unit 37a and a second result display unit 37b. Each of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b includes a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the big hit lottery triggered by the winning to the first start port 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a displays, as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result is performed on the segment display, A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery ends, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. When the big hit lottery triggered by the winning at the second start port 34 is performed, the second result display unit 37b displays a variable display or a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. A predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display portion 37c and a second hold display portion 37d made of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are put on hold. The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting port 33 with the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four game balls that are won in the second start opening 34 are put on hold. The second hold display unit 37d displays the number of hold of the second start port 34 according to the color or combination of the LED lamps to be lit.

  The universal map unit 38 includes a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electrification opening release lottery triggered by winning a prize to the through gate 35 is performed, the universal map unit 38 displays a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as a display form of the light emitting display. When the electrification opening lottery is completed, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special map unit 37 and the universal map unit 38 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light-emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT, or a dot matrix display For example, it may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games occurring in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is an open / close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a variable winning device 36. It is a game that continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area GA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is configured by a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  When the first result display unit 37a performs variation display or predetermined display based on the winning to the first start port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. In addition, when the second result display unit 37b performs variation display or predetermined display based on winning in the second start port 34, the symbol display device 41 performs variation display or predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 but also a display effect during the opening / closing execution mode that shifts when a big win is won. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols and display surfaces 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design by which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows the numbers 1-8 as a symbol which is variably displayed.

  FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from below. A variable display that scrolls up is displayed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when a game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, the variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity is started. The symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the big win lottery by the main controller 60 is a big win, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the effective line L.

  In the present specification, one game time refers to the first start port 33 or the second start port in either the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b and the symbol display device 41. A period from when the variable display is started based on any one of the 34 prizes until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and the next variable display is started. The time required for one game time is also referred to as a display duration time. The display continuation time is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and after the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, the change of the next game time is started. And the stop display time which is the time until In addition, the mode of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, but the number of symbol columns, the number of effective lines, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the symbols of each symbol column Various modes can be adopted as the mode of the variable display of symbols such as the number.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG.4 (b), on the display surface 41a of the symbol display apparatus 41, the 1st reservation display area Ds1 and the 2nd reservation display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first hold display area Ds1, the number of holds based on winning in the first start port 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of holds based on winning in the second start port 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of reserved game balls won in the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 is up to four each.

A2. The electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured with the main control device 60 as a center, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 composed of elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the program recorded in the ROM 63 is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the functions of the MPU 62. Details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. Various detection sensors 67 a to 67 e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The MPU 62 is supplied with power of DC stable 24V from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, converts external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the MPU 62 has a plurality of detection sensors 67a to 67e as a plurality of award winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning apparatus 36. It is connected to the detection sensor, and a winning determination is made as to whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area GA has won a winning opening during the game. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the winnings at the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34, and executes the electric accessory opening lottery based on the winnings at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the second start port 34, and a main display. The part 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuit.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed. Further, when the electrification opening is selected as a result of the electrification opening release lottery, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electrification accessory driving unit 34b so that the electrification accessory 34a is opened. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Execute display control.

  Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the payout control device 70 based on the winning determination result. When the main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a winning to the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a winning to the first start opening 33 is specified. In this case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a winning to the second starting port 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. A prize ball command is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize ball. A discharge control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 performs launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14 and driving control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, an effect operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. Various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control apparatus 100, etc. are controlled.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. At the same time, the presence / absence of reach, the contents of the reach effect, the contents of the notice effect executed at each game round, and the like are grasped.
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for jackpot lottery. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, the display setting of the main display unit 45, the symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery, and the jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, and the symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41 are displayed. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach lottery for determining whether or not to generate reach when changing out of line, and a random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting an initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. In addition, when determining the display duration in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the counter value every time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b. The holding information storage area 64b includes a first result display area holding area Ra, a second result display area holding area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total holding number storage area. When game balls sequentially win the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing are time-sequentially stored in the hold information storage area 64b. Stored in

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 599 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start opening 33, and the second start opening 34 is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb of the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball is won. The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 as a success / failure table.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode for the big hit lottery. FIG. 7A shows a success / failure table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a success / failure table for the high probability. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for the jackpot winning is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, under the gaming state in which the winning table for the high probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is 21. In addition, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining jackpot types such as probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 29 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. More specifically, when the game ball is won at the first start opening 33, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b (RAM 64), and the game ball is won at the second start opening 34. It is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section of the hold information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing.

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set for the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing a difference in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Aspects of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery lottery lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above-described (1) opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so that is relatively high. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until it becomes a piece. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings to the opening / closing door 36b. Can be set to continue until there are six.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area GA every 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one opening / closing door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open / close door 36b is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball can occur.

  Note that the number of opening / closing of the open / close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the occurrence frequency is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the open / close door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the configuration may be such that the variable winning device 36 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes a probability variation lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a high-probability winner table as the winner table as a mode of the jackpot lottery mode after the end of the above-described (2) opening / closing execution mode, It is possible to set a normal lottery mode in which a jackpot lottery is performed using a low probability success / failure table. As described with reference to FIG. 7, the winning of the jackpot lottery using the high probability success / failure table is larger than the winning of the jackpot lottery using the low probability winning / failing table. The probability of doing is high.

  The pachinko machine 10 continues to emit game balls in the same manner with respect to the game area GA as the mode of support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 after the end of the above-described (3) opening / closing execution mode. When the comparison is made in the situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are such that the frequency at which the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high. Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning an electric combination release in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode, The number of times that the electric utility item 34a is in the open state when the electrification release is won may be set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the one open time may be set longer. In addition, in the case where the electrification opening is elected in the high frequency support mode and the opening state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state until the next opening state is started is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric actor release lottery is performed after the first electric agent release lottery than in the low-frequency support mode. May be.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize at the second start port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first start port 33 than in the second start port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start than in the first start port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning at the second starting port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. Can do.

  In addition, the configuration in which the high frequency support mode is set to have a higher frequency of being in the power release state per unit time than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming a winning combination winning. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of securing times to be secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed, in the high frequency support mode, the frequency is low. It may be set so that a shorter securing time is more easily selected than the support mode or the average securing time is shortened. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, Apply one of the conditions of any one or any combination among shortening the average duration of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be set with a plurality of types of jackpots. In the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort a plurality of jackpot types. The jackpot type allocation destination corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the allocation table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the sorting table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first result display section, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second result display section.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first result display unit in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first start port 33, 8R normal jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R Probable variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot is set. In the 8R normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the low probability mode, and the opening / closing execution mode The support mode after the end of is a jackpot that becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode in the 8R normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference count (specifically, 100 times) after shifting to the high-frequency support mode.

  In the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode, the winning lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the opening / closing execution mode The support mode after the end of is a jackpot that becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode for the 8R probability variable jackpot and the 16R probability variable jackpot continues until the next jackpot win.

  In the distribution table for the first result display section, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 5” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot, and “6 to 8” is the 16R normal jackpot. Corresponding to jackpot, “9-23” corresponds to 8R probability variation jackpot, and “24-29” corresponds to 16R probability variation jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the jackpot type. Therefore, the mode of jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest in the 16R probability variable jackpot, the next highest in the 8R probability variable jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. Thus, by setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different advantages for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second result display unit in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second start port 34, 8R normal jackpot, 16R normal The jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot are set. In the distribution table for the second result display section, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 2” corresponds to 8R normal jackpot, and “3 to 8” is 16R normal. Corresponding to jackpot, "9-14" corresponds to 8R probability variation jackpot, and "15-29" corresponds to 16R probability variation jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won is based on the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning to the first start port 33, and the second This is different from the case where a big win is won based on the winning at the start opening 34.

  On the other hand, in both the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the probability of being allocated to the promising big hit when the big win is won is the same. That is, in both the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 allocated to the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are allocated. The total number of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been set is 21 in all cases. However, the probability of occurrence of the 16R probability variation jackpot, which is the most advantageous for the player among the probability variation jackpots, is more likely to be given to the first start port 33 when winning the jackpot based on the winning of the second start port 34. It will be higher than if you win a jackpot based on winning.

  As described above, the jackpot type distribution mode between the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays the game while expecting that a winning of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34 will occur at the second start port 34. In addition, when it becomes a losing result in the success / failure lottery, the open / close execution mode is not shifted and neither the success / failure lottery mode nor the support mode is changed.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. In addition, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop the symbols displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. To decide. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball is won in the first start port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. Then, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb moves to the execution area AE, and then the reach determination table storage area 63c in the ROM 63. And whether or not to generate reach is determined. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when winning the jackpot and shifting to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach is the stop of a combination of symbols that may be a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot for a portion of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in the state of the remaining symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol row Z2 is subjected to the variable display of the symbol, thereby reaching a reach. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state that the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, A combination of performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when the reach effect is being performed, or prior to the reach display, it is determined whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the display duration in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b and the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41. The display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used for determining the display duration in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to be incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state using the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in a closed state.

  Note that a combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display section holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first start port 33, and 2 A combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the result display section holding area Rb corresponds to the holding information related to the second start port 34, and these holding information Corresponds to the special information in the present invention.

A3. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in order to advance the game of each game time will be described. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of a power failure signal in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60.

  In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to zero. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, a winning process for the starting port accompanying winning in the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is executed. Details of the winning process for the start opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing Step S104, the process proceeds to Step S105.

  In step S105, a through winning process for winning through the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through winning process in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for start-up>
Next, the winning process for the start opening will be described. The winning process for the start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9: S104).

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the start opening. In step S <b> 201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start opening 33 whether or not the game ball has won the first start opening 33 (start winning prize). If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the first start opening 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the first start port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, the start hold number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first start hold number RaN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the first result display portion hold area Ra, is read, and the first start hold number is read. RaN is set as a target of processing to be described later. The first start reservation number RaN indicates the number of reservations based on winning in the first start port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first start port 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and whether the game ball has won the second start port 34 (start win). Whether or not is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second start port 34.

  If it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the second start port 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won the second starting port 34 (S205: NO), the starting process for the starting port is terminated.

  In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S208.

  In step S208, the start hold number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second start hold number RbN), which is a value stored in the hold number storage area of the second result display section hold area Rb, is read, and the second start hold number is read. RbN is set as a target of processing to be described later. The second start reserved number RbN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number N of start suspensions (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, if the number N of starting suspension is not less than the upper limit value (S209: NO), the winning process for the starting port is ended. On the other hand, in step S209, if the start suspension number N is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, and after adding 1 to the start suspension number N of the corresponding result display section suspension area, In step S211, 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved number CRN). The total reserved number CRN indicates the total value of the first start reserved number RaN and the second start reserved number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used as the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding result display area holding area, ie, step In S210, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are set to the first The result is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first storage area RaN obtained by adding 1 in the free storage area of the storage area Ra for the result display section, that is, 1 in step S210. When the second start hold number RbN is set as a processing target, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are displayed as the second result. Stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the department storage area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. After executing Step S212, the process proceeds to Step S213.

  In step S213, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold command. Thereafter, the winning process for the start opening is terminated. The hold command indicates that the winning at the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has occurred, and the hold information acquired based on the win is a voice light emission control device 90 and a display control device which are sub-side control devices. 100, and whether or not the hold information related to the winning this time corresponds to the jackpot, if it corresponds to the jackpot, which type of jackpot is supported, whether it corresponds to the occurrence of reach This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm whether or not the hold information is the target of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60. This hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in an external output process (FIG. 12: step S402) of a normal process described later, and the sound light emission control device 90 that has received the hold command receives a confirmation process (FIG. 27: described later). In step S1602, FIG. 29), whether or not the hold information related to the current winning is corresponding to the jackpot, and if corresponding to the jackpot, which type of jackpot is supported, corresponding to the occurrence of reach. Whether or not the hold information is to be a target of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60.

  In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold on the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing in accordance with is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning at the second start port 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of hold on the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing in accordance with is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  Note that the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 determines the current winning based on the information (holding information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the current winning. Confirmation process for confirming whether or not the hold information related to the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot, if it corresponds to the jackpot, which type of jackpot is supported, whether it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, etc. ( 27 (step S1602 in FIG. 27 and the same processing as the confirmation processing in FIG. 29) may be executed, and the confirmation result may be set in the pending command. In this case, the confirmation process (FIG. 27: step S1602, FIG. 29) by the sound emission control device 90 can be omitted.

<Winning winning process>
Next, a through winning process will be described. The through winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9: S105).

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a through winning process. In step S301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has won the through gate 35 (S301: YES), the process proceeds to step S302, and whether or not the number of reserved items SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether. Note that the accessory reserve number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 that is reserved for performing the electric accessory release lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved items SN is 4. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S301: NO), the through-winning process is terminated.

  In step S302, when it is determined that it is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) of the accessory reserve number SN (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and 1 is added to the accessory reserve number SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S304. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S302 that the value of the reserved item number SN is not less than the upper limit value (S302: NO), that is, when it is determined that the value of the reserved item number SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, The through-winning process is terminated without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  In step S304, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the winning process for this through is finished.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal process, the main process of the game is executed.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S401, a startup process is executed. Specifically, initial setting of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a change command and a type command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step S402, the process proceeds to Step S403.

  In step S403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, a game times control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot lottery, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing Step S405, the process proceeds to Step S406.

  In step S406, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S407.

  In step S <b> 407, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34 a provided at the second start port 34 is executed. In the electric combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened. The details of the power combination support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S408.

  In step S408, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the external output process in step S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached. In step S408, when it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the normal processing this time (S408: NO), in step S409 and step S410, until the next normal processing execution timing is reached. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time. Specifically, in step S409, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S410, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S408: YES), the process returns to step S402, and the processes from step S402 to step S407 are performed. Run.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S402 to step S407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 12: S405).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game times control process. In step S501, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in a gaming state transition process to be described later, and is similarly deleted when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  If it is determined in step S501 that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect (S501: YES), the game turn control process is terminated without executing any of the processes after step S502. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has occurred. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the opening / closing execution mode is not in effect (S501: NO), the process proceeds to step S502.

  In step S502, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is in a variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The variable display flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is erased when the variable display ends.

  In step S502, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing variable display (S502: NO), the process proceeds to a game turn starting process in steps S503 to S505. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the total reserved number CRN is “0”. The case where the total reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved number is “0” for both the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step S503 that the total reserved number CRN is “0” (S503: YES), this game number control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S503 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (S503: NO), the process proceeds to step S504.

  In step S504, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb to the state after the start of variation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S505, a variation start process for starting variation display on the main display unit 45 and variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated. Details of the variation start process will be described later.

  In step S502, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is in a variable display (S502: YES), the process for progressing game times in steps S506 to S509 is executed.

  In step S506, it is determined whether or not the current game times variation display time has elapsed. As described above, the variable display time is the time from when the symbol sequence starts to change until all the symbol sequences are stopped, and is a part of the display duration time. Specifically, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in a display duration setting process (FIG. 15: S714) described later. The value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started.

  If it is determined in step S506 that the variable display time has not elapsed (S506: NO), the process proceeds to step S507, and the variable display process is executed. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit related to the current game round. After executing step S507, the game times control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S506 that the variable display time has elapsed (S506: YES), the process proceeds to step S508, and the variable end process is executed. In the variation end process, the result display unit is displayed so that the pattern display to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the variation start process (S505) described later is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game round. Control. After executing Step S508, the process proceeds to Step S509.

  In step S509, a change end command is set. The change end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect in the game time based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the final stop symbol in the game round (final stop). Display). After executing step S509, the game times control process is terminated.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to use the change end command. In this case, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 measure the elapsed time from the start of the game time with a timer counter or the like, and based on the elapse of a predetermined time, It is only necessary to end the presentation or to display the final stop symbol in the game times (final stop display).

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 13: S504).

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the second start hold number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. If it is determined in step S601 that the second start pending number RbN is “0” (S601: YES), the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S607 is executed, If it is determined that the second start pending number RbN is not “0” (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S613 is executed.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the total reserved number CRN is 1 or more as described in FIG. 13 (see FIG. 13: S503). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is stored for the second result display portion 37b. If the first start hold number RaN is equal to or greater than 1, the data stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb is the target of the data setting process. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb, the second result display area corresponding to the second start port 34 is used. The hold information stored in the hold area Rb is prioritized.

  In step S602, 1 is subtracted from the first start hold number RaN of the first result display section hold area Ra, and then the process proceeds to step S603, where the total hold number CRN is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S605.

  In step S605, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing Step S605, the process proceeds to Step S606.

  In step S606, if the second result display unit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 64e, the flag is deleted, and if not stored, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the current variable display is the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S607.

  In step S607, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the first start port 33. Is selected as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold to the display control device 100. To do. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  If it is determined in step S601 that the second start pending number RbN is not “0” (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S613 is executed as described above. To do.

  In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the second start holding number RbN of the second result display portion holding area Rb. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S609. In step S609, 1 is subtracted from the total reserved number CRN, and the process proceeds to step S610 to move the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S611.

  In step S611, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted such as second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After executing Step S611, the process proceeds to Step S612.

  In step S612, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the second result display unit flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e, the flag is stored. If stored, the flag is stored. Maintain state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S613.

  In step S613, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the second start port 34. Is selected as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 gives the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold. Send. The display control apparatus 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display apparatus 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game times control process (FIG. 13: S505).

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the variation start process. In step S <b> 701, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this embodiment, the high probability mode flag is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to winning the probability variation big win, After that, it will be erased if you win the jackpot.

  In step S701, when it is determined that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode (S701: NO), the process proceeds to step S702, and the determination is made with reference to the determining table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the low probability mode winning / failing table shown in FIG. Determine whether. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the mode is the high probability mode (S701: YES), the process proceeds to step S703, and the determination is made with reference to the high probability mode determination table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the high-probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 7B. Determine whether. After executing Step S702 or Step S703, the process proceeds to Step S704.

  In step S704, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S702 or step S703 is a jackpot winning. In step S704, if the determination result is a big win (S704: YES), in step S705 to step S712, a process for setting a game result in the case of a big win and a stop result are set. Execute the process.

  In step S705, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S705 that the second result display unit flag is not stored (S705: NO), the process proceeds to step S706, and the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 8A). Referring to, perform the distribution determination. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of a numerical range per 8R normal jackpot, a numerical range per 16R normal jackpot, a numerical range per 8R probability variable jackpot, and a numerical range per 16R probability jackpot Is included.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S705 that the second result display unit flag is stored (S705: YES), the process proceeds to step S707, and the distribution table for the second result display unit (FIG. 8B). Refer to) and perform the distribution determination. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of a numerical range per 8R normal jackpot, a numerical range per 16R normal jackpot, a numerical range per 8R probability variable jackpot, and a numerical range per 16R probability jackpot Is included. After executing the process of step S706 or step S707. The process proceeds to step S708.

  In step S708, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type distributed in step S706 or step S707 is a probabilistic jackpot. If it is determined in step S708 that the game result is a probable big hit (S708: YES), the process proceeds to step S709.

  In step S709, a probabilistic big hit stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is a variation in the state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the current game round that will be won for the probability variation jackpot. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the probability variation jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S706 or step S707 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S709, the process proceeds to Step S710.

  In step S710, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S706 or step S707 (big jackpot type flag) is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. Specifically, an 8R probability variation flag is stored when the 8R probability variation jackpot, and a 15R probability variation flag is stored when the 15R probability variation jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S714.

  If it is determined in step S708 that the jackpot type assigned in step S706 or step S707 is not a probabilistic jackpot (S708: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S711.

  In step S711, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The stop result setting process for normal jackpots varies in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display part 37a or the second result display part 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S706 or step S707 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S711, the process proceeds to Step S712.

  In step S712, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S706 or step S707 (big hit type flag) is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. Specifically, an 8R normal flag is stored in the case of 8R normal big hit, and a 15R normal flag is stored in the case of 15R normal big hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S714.

  In step S704, when the result of the jackpot lottery in step S702 or step S703 is not a jackpot winning prize (S704: NO), the process proceeds to step S713, and a stop result setting process for losing is executed. The stop result setting process at the time of detachment is to end the variable display in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first result display part 37a or the second result display part 37b in the current game round that becomes a detachment result. This is a process for setting. Specifically, the stop result data address information corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for outage in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S713, the process proceeds to Step S714.

  In step S714, display duration setting processing is executed. The display continuation time setting process sets the display continuation time, which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display part 37a or the second result display part 37b, based on the presence or absence of jackpots or the occurrence of reach. It is a process to do. Details of the display duration setting process will be described later. After executing Step S714, the process proceeds to Step S715.

  In step S715, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S715 that the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S715: NO), the process proceeds to step S716, and the first variation command is set. The first change command includes information indicating that the current game time relates to the hold information acquired based on the winning at the first start port 33, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the display duration information set in step S714 are included. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S715 that the second result display unit flag is stored (S715: YES), the process proceeds to step S717, and the second variation command is set. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning at the second start port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the display duration information set in step S714 are included. After executing Step S716 or Step S717, the process proceeds to Step S718.

  In step S718, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence / absence of jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, 16R ordinary jackpot information, or outage result information as jackpot type information.

  The variation command and type command set in steps S716 to S718 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Based on the received change command and type command, the sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect at the game time and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing Step S718, the process proceeds to Step S719.

  In step S719, a change display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64, it is determined that the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is the first result display unit 37a and the variable display is started. When the second result display unit flag is stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is identified as the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S719, the fluctuation starting process is terminated.

<Display duration setting process>
Next, display duration setting processing will be described. The display continuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 15: S714).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a display continuation time setting process. In step S801, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 62. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S802, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If any flag is stored, it is determined that the reach occurs (S802: YES). ), The process proceeds to step S803. Even when none of the above flags is stored, reach occurs when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach. Then, it determines (S802: YES) and progresses to step S803. Note that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when the occurrence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3 is specified.

  In step S803, the display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804, and the variable display time information included in the display duration information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the display duration setting process is terminated.

  In step S802, if it is determined that no reach occurs in the current game round (S802: NO), the process proceeds to step S805, and the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d. , The display duration corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S806, and the variable display time information included in the display continuation time information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the display duration setting process is terminated.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display duration information stored in the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the total number of reserved numbers CRN increases. Yes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the total reserved number CRN may be used. The smaller the total reserved number CRN, the shorter the display continuation time may be. . Further, when the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the display continuation time becomes shorter as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. Alternatively, the display continuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of the second start hold numbers RbN is larger. Further, when the second start hold number RbN is “0”, the display continuation time becomes longer as the first start hold number RaN is larger, and the second start hold number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the display continuation time becomes longer as the number of the second start reserved number RbN is larger or becomes constant without depending on each of the reserved numbers RaN and RbN.

  In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. A generation display duration table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected display continuation time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when the reach occurs, and the display continuation time that is easy to select and the display continuation time that is difficult to select are different between the jackpot winning and the losing reach. It is good also as a structure. In addition, the display duration table for probability variation jackpots, the display duration table for normal jackpots, the display duration table for miss reach, and the display duration table for complete miss may be set individually. As described above, the display continuation time of each game time is determined by using, as parameters, the presence / absence of a jackpot, the presence / absence of reach, the number of pending information, and the value of the variation type counter.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 12: S406).

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing a game state transition process. In step S901, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is determined in step S901 that the opening / closing execution mode is not in effect (S901: NO), the process proceeds to step S902, and the change display of the symbols on the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b of one game time is displayed. It is determined whether or not the timing is finished. In step S902, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display is finished (S902; NO), the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is determined in step S902 that it is the timing when the variable display is finished (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903, and the game result of the current game round (the result of the big hit lottery) is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not it is compatible. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 8R probability change flag, 16R probability change flag, 8R normal flag, and 16R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined that none of the flags is stored (S903: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S903 that any one of the above flags is stored (S903: YES), the process proceeds to step S904, and a round display start process for notifying the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is performed. Run. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Check. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step S904, the process proceeds to Step S905.

  In step S905, the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the big hit type flag (16R probability change flag, 16R normal flag, 8R probability change flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 is checked. If it is determined in step S905 that the big hit type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R probability variation flag or the 16R normal flag (S905: YES), the process proceeds to step S906, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S905 that the big hit type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R probability variation flag or the 8R normal flag (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907 and is provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. “8” is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing Step S906 or Step S907, the process proceeds to Step S908.

  In step S908, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). This opening command includes information on the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. After executing step S908, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S901 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S909, and a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed. Specifically, when the grand prize winning opening 36a is closed, the variable prize driving unit 36c is set in the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is “1” or more. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big prize opening 36a is being opened, the variable prize driving unit is provided on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big prize opening 36a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the special winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the big prize opening / closing process will be described later. After executing Step S909, the process proceeds to Step S910.

  In step S910, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S910: NO), the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S910: YES), the process proceeds to step S911, and an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing Step S911, the process proceeds to Step S912.

  In step S912, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is a process for setting various modes of game times after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode. Details of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described later. After executing Step S912, the process proceeds to Step S913.

  In step S913, a round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is terminated so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S914 and the completion | finish process of opening / closing execution mode is performed. Specifically, when the 16R probability change flag, 8R probability change flag, 16 normal flag, and 8R normal flag are stored, these flags are deleted, and when these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. To do. After executing step S914, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

<Big prize opening and closing process>
Next, the prize winning opening / closing process will be described. The big prize opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S909) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special prize opening / closing process. In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1001 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1002: YES), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1003: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1004, and the variable prize driving unit for opening the big prize opening 36a. Let 36c be a driving state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, a setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since all the winning modes that are set are the high-frequency winning modes, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 36 a, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64 d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec. If the low-frequency winning mode is set in the pachinko machine 10, for example, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and “6” is set in the winning counter area PC. May be set. After executing Step S1005, the process proceeds to Step S1006.

  In step S1006, a release command is set. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The release command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the sub-side control devices to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a is started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 12: Step S402). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been started, and the effect contents on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Is updated to the content corresponding to the start of the release of. The sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received release command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the large winning opening 36a for one round has been started, and the display contents of the effect on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the large winning opening 36a has been opened. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1007 to determine whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0”. To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1007: NO), the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 36a is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S1008 that no winning has occurred (S1008: NO), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1008 that a winning has occurred (S1008: YES), the process proceeds to step S1009, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter area PC. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1010.

  In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not “0” (S1010: NO), the large winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1007: YES), or if the value of the winning counter area PC is determined to be “0” in step S1010 (S1010: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011 and a special winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1012.

  In step S1012, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first round counter area RC1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1013, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1013: YES), the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1013: NO), “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1014, the process proceeds to step S1015 to set a close command. Thereafter, the special prize opening / closing process is terminated.

The set closing command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 which are the control devices on the sub side to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed. In the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402), the sound is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the one-round large winning opening 36a has been completed, and the contents of the effects on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are displayed on the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the end of opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the close command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round has been completed, and the effect on the symbol display device 41 is ended with the opening of the large winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to what you did.
Processing corresponding to that is executed.

<Transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode>
Next, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described. The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S912) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the RAM 64 stores a flag corresponding to the probability variation jackpot as the jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102, and flag erasure processing is executed. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying the gaming state. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode flag, high probability mode flag, and high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and if these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. To do. After executing Step S1102, the process proceeds to Step S1103.

  In step S1103, the high probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S1104 to store the high frequency support flag. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the game state is shifted to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1106, and the flag erasing process is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, after storing the high frequency support flag, the process proceeds to step S1108, and “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the game state is shifted to the gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, in this case, the high-frequency support mode ends after the game times have been executed 100 times, and thereafter, the winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. . After executing step S1108, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode ends.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the power combination support process will be described. The electric role support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of a normal process (FIG. 12: S407).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the power combination support process. In step S1201, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supporting flag is stored in a supporting flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the second start port 34 is opened, and is erased when it is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1201 that the supporting flag is not stored (S1201: NO), the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S1202, it is determined whether or not a support winning flag is stored in a support winning flag storage area provided in various flag storing areas 64e of the RAM 64. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when an open state winning lottery is performed in order to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, and is deleted when a supporting flag is stored. . If it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is not stored (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display duration time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S1203 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1203: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204.

  In step S1204, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the normal unit 38. If it is determined in step S1204 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S1204: YES), the process advances to step S1205 to set off display, and then the main role support process is ended. By setting the out-of-display, the symbol change display in the general-purpose unit 38 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1204 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1204: NO), the process proceeds to step S1206.

  In step S1206, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved item number SN is greater than “0”. If it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the reserved item SN is “0” (S1206: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0” (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S1208 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S1207 (S1207: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is in step S1208 (S1208: YES), the process proceeds to step S1209, and an electric-powered object opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric charge holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric charge release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric charge release lottery is performed. Winning. Further, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 simultaneously with the lottery for opening the electric accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1210.

  In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1209 is a support win. In step S1210, when it is determined that the result of the lottery for opening the electrical equipment is support winning (S1210: YES), the process proceeds to step S1211 to store a support winning flag and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1212. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1210 that the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery is not support winning (S1210: NO), the process proceeds to step S1212 without executing the process of step S1211.

  In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a low probability mode. If it is determined in step S1212 that the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1212: YES), the process proceeds to step S1213. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1212 that the success / failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S1212: NO), the main role support process is terminated as it is.

  In step S1213, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S1213 that the game number counter area is not “0” (S1213: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1213 that the game number counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1214, and the high frequency support flag is deleted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1215, the low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the electronic role support process is terminated.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1215 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 12: step S402). The voice light emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode.

  If it is determined in step S1207 that the opening / closing execution mode is selected (S1207: YES), or if it is determined in step S1218 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S1208: NO), the process proceeds to step S1216, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric charge holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric charge release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric charge release lottery is performed. Winning. At the same time as the lottery for the opening of the electric accessory, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1217.

  In step S1217, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1216 is a support win. If it is determined in step S1217 that the support is not won (S1217: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1217 that the support win is selected (S1217: YES), the process proceeds to step S1218, the support win flag is stored, and “2” is set in the second round counter area RC2. The processing for the main role support is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is stored (S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step S1219, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display duration time of the general map unit 38. If it is determined in step S1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1219: NO), since the fluctuation display of the picture in the normal unit 38 is being performed, the main role supporting process is continued. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1219: YES), the process proceeds to step S1220.

  In step S1220, a win display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the general map unit 38 is terminated in a state where the hit display is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1221, where the supporting flag is stored and the support winning flag is deleted. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1201 that the supporting flag is stored (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1222, and the electric combination opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric combination 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

<Electrical opening and closing process>
Next, the electric role opening / closing process will be described. The power combination opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the power combination support process (FIG. 20: S1222).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the power combination opening / closing process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1302: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric utility item 34a has not ended, the main electric character opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to a closed state is performed. “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the duration of opening of the electric accessory 34a is “0”, the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is now electrically operated. As a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the accessory 34a, “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step S1303, the process proceeds to Step S1304.

  In step S1304, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1305, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S1305: NO), the main role opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S1305: YES), the process proceeds to step S1306, and the supporting flag is deleted. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1307, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1307 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1307: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1307 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1307: YES), the process proceeds to step S1308 to execute an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the opened state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1309, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode (S1309: NO), the process proceeds to step S1310, and it is determined whether or not it is the high-frequency support mode. To do.

  If it is determined in step S1310 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S1310: YES), the process proceeds to step S1311, and “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1309 that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode (S1309: YES), or if it is determined in step S1310 that the mode is not the frequent support mode (S1310: NO), the process proceeds to step S1312, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

A4. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. A part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio emission control board 91 provided in the audio emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, in some of the areas of the ROM 93, a hold confirmation table storage area 93a, an existing visual announcement occurrence table storage area 93b, an existing visual announcement advance notice table storage area 93c, and an existing visual announcement stop symbol table storage. An area 93d, a variable display pattern table storage area 93e, and the like are provided. Details of these will be described later.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, there are provided various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, a notice effect storage area 94d for existing visual notice. Details of these will be described later. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main controller 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, an effect operation button 24, a speaker 46, and various lamps 47 are connected, and a display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control apparatus 100 includes an MPU 102 which is a chip in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background images.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and is a kind of microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 41 to display it.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106. Further, it is possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are respectively referred to as the sound light side MPU 92 and sound light side. The ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

A5. Previous visual notice:
A5-1. Overview of previous visual notice:
Next, the outline of the visual notice notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a time chart showing an example of a visual notice notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the previous visual notice is executed. Pre-visual notice means that a player is given a visual sense (dejab) that an effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times by causing the player to execute the effect element a plurality of times with the same content. It is an effect to give. An effect element is a unit constituting a game effect. For example, a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image (still image or moving image) in front of a background image, a predetermined object image such as a mini character as a background Object notice effect (mini-character notice effect) to be displayed in front of the image, background change notice effect that changes the background image to a mode different from the normal time, a feature notice effect that causes a given accessory to perform a prescribed action, various A lamp emission effect that causes the lamp to emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol sequence variation effect that changes the symbol sequence in a predetermined scroll pattern, and the remaining one symbol with two identical symbols stopped on at least one active line Reach effect that fluctuates the column, design pseudo stop effect that pseudo-stops the combination of predetermined symbols, and complete stop of the predetermined symbol combination And the like can be given that design complete stop demonstration.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, that is, whether or not to generate the visual notice based on the hold information. If it is determined that the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 is to wait until the game time related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual notice is completed. At least one effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the determination as to whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied before the hold information that is the target of the determination becomes the target of the big hit lottery. .

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has confirmed that the following conditions are satisfied when a game ball wins the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 and obtains the hold information. Then, the already-notified visual notice generation lottery process described later is executed. When the lottery process for generating a notice of prior notice is won, the condition for generating the notice of prior notice is satisfied.
(Condition 1) The stored information corresponding to the jackpot is not included in the stored information already stored. (Condition 2) When a game ball wins the first starting port 33, the winning is related to the current winning. The total reserved number CRN including the hold information is 2 or more (Condition 3) When a game ball wins the second start port 34, the second start hold number RbN including the hold information related to the current winning Is 2 or more

  The reason for the condition 1 is that even if the game element related to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot and the game time related to the hold information won this time are used and the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it corresponds to the jackpot This is because, since the jackpot effect is executed after the game times related to the hold information to be performed, the continuity of the effect elements having the same contents executed a plurality of times is interrupted, and it becomes difficult to give the player a visual sensation. The reason for the condition 2 and the condition 3 is that, if the number of holds including the hold information related to the current winning is 2 or more, the existing visual notice can be executed over a plurality of game times. In addition, in the condition 3, the reason why the second start reserved number RbN is a standard is that the hold information acquired by winning the second start port 34 is the first start port 33 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. It is because it becomes a target of the big hit lottery in preference to the hold information acquired by the winning. However, these conditions are examples, other conditions may be imposed, and conditions may not be present. For example, these conditions may not be necessary in the case where a production element having the same contents is executed a plurality of times in one game round.

  In the lottery process for generating a pre-announcement notice according to the present embodiment, the pre-announcement notice is provided only when the hold information related to the current winning prize is the hold information that will result in a big win or reach when the big win lottery is selected later. You can win the outbreak. The reason for this is that a relatively long display duration is set in the game times related to the hold information that results in a big win or a reach occurrence, so that it is easy to execute a suggestion effect or a battle effect, which will be described later. Then, in the case that the lottery process for generating a prior notice notice is won, the condition for generating the notice notice is satisfied, and the pachinko machine 10 is put on hold in which it is determined that the condition for generating the notice notice is satisfied. At least one effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same contents until the game times related to the information are completed.

  In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 2, the game ball wins the first starting port 33 and the total reserved number CRN becomes 3, and based on the hold information related to the winning As a result of the above-described determination, the case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied is shown. The game time P03 indicated as the third game time is the game time related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual notice notice.

  In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the pachinko machine 10 selects the cut-in notice effect A having the same content as the effect element A to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the cut-in having the same content is selected. The notice effect A is executed once for each of the three game times P01, P02, and P03. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 executes the cut-in notice effect A in all consecutive game times until the game times related to the hold information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the visual notice are satisfied. Yes.

  Further, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol complete stop effect in which the symbol A (for example, the combination of symbols “1, 2, 3”) is completely stopped in the first game time P01. And a symbol complete stop effect for completely stopping the same off symbol A in the second game time P02. That is, the pachinko machine 10 selects the same symbol complete stop effect of completely stopping the same off symbol A as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the symbol complete stop of the same content The production is executed multiple times.

  Further, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes the symbol pseudo stop effect for pseudo stopping the off symbol A after executing the cut-in notice effect A in the third game time P3. Yes. Strictly speaking, the symbol pseudo stop effect is different from the symbol complete stop effect in that the symbol is not completely stopped. However, the aspect of the effects that the player can recognize is very similar between the case where the combination of symbols is stopped in a pseudo manner and the case where the combination is completely stopped. Therefore, in this specification, if the content of the combination of symbols to be pseudo-stopped is the same, the symbol pseudo-stop effect is regarded as an effect element having the same content as the symbol complete stop effect that completely stops the symbol. Hereinafter, the symbol complete stop effect and the symbol pseudo stop effect are collectively referred to as a symbol stop effect.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. . In the example shown in FIG. 24, the suggestive effect is to display an image of a female character throwing a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” on the player on the symbol display device 41, and sound and light accompanying the image are displayed. In this mode, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are output. However, the suggestion effect may be in other forms as long as it can indicate to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. For example, “Possibly dejab?” , "Is it dejab?", "Dejab?", "Is dejab a sign of a big hit?", "This production, I remember it!", "That? An image including a message such as “This is already a feeling of feeling !?” or “I'm tired of just the same production ...” is displayed on the symbol display device 41, or a sound including these messages is output from the speaker 46 It may be an effect or the like.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, then executes the battle effect in which the player character and the enemy character confront each other, and then the result corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery Production (execute victory when winning a big win, defeat production etc. when the result is lost) is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 24, in the battle effect, an image in which a female character on the player side and a male character on the enemy side confront each other is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and sound and light accompanying the image are displayed on the speaker 46. And various lamps 47. However, the battle effect may be in another form or omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the victory effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 with an image that the female character on the player side is delighted to win, and the sound and light accompanying the image are displayed on the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. It is the aspect which makes it output. However, the victory effect as the result effect may be other forms or may be omitted. Thereafter, when the jackpot is won, a jackpot effect corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the production element with the same contents is executed a plurality of times, the existing feeling (dejab) that the production element with the same contents is executed a plurality of times for the player. Can be given. The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot. Furthermore, if the player experiences winning the jackpot after the same content element is executed multiple times, the effect element is executed in the hope that the same content element will be executed multiple times. Every time they are done, they will always pay attention to the production elements with high expectations. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not an effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and the attention degree of the player to the effect elements that are sequentially executed is increased. It can be increased suitably, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, different reliability (expectation) can be set for each type of effect element executed in a single shot. For example, highly reliable effect elements have the same content. If executed multiple times, the player strongly expects that the possibility of winning the jackpot is very high, while the performance element with low reliability is executed. However, the player comes to expect that the effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the degree of attention of the player to the effect element can be suitably increased.

  In addition, even if there is not an effect that directly suggests that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot, for example, an effect that lights a pre-read hold lamp or the like in a color different from the normal time, the same content A game of paying attention to whether or not the effect element is executed a plurality of times can be added.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed, so that the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same content can be recognized. It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the performance element is executed a plurality of times. Then, if the stage element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the player is only coincidental that the stage element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, or the visual feeling with the suggestion stage. Whether or not it was a notice is confirmed by whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and the suggestion effect is expected to be executed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can execute an operation acceptance effect element (button effect) including content suggesting acceptance of the operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as an effect element. When the conditions for generating the visual notice are satisfied, the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The reason for this will be described. When the button effect is executed a plurality of times, the button effect is executed with different contents depending on the input operation mode of the effect operation button 24 by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). There is a case. For this reason, even if the occurrence condition of the previous visual notification is satisfied and the pachinko machine 10 executes the same type of button effect a plurality of times, depending on the input operation mode of the effect operation button 24, There is a case where the performance is executed with different contents, and it is impossible to give the player a visual sensation. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, different contents are executed depending on the input operation mode of the effect operation button 24 by the player. Can be suppressed, and the player can be surely given a visual sensation. However, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to cancel execution of the existing visual notice when the button effect is selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times even when the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied. It may be configured.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery. If it is determined that the conditions for generating a visual notice have been met, the hold information that has been determined that the conditions for generating a visual notice have been satisfied is to be executed a plurality of times before the jackpot lottery is selected The execution of the production element is started. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling over a plurality of game times.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines the display continuation time, which is the time required for each game time, immediately before starting each game time. For this reason, if the generation condition of the existing visual announcement is satisfied and the type of the effect element (for example, cut-in announcement effect) to be executed multiple times in the existing visual announcement is selected at random, within the display duration of each game time There may be a case where an effect element having a length that cannot be executed is selected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect that can be executed within the shortest display duration among the display durations that can be selected in each game time when the conditions for occurrence of the visual notice are satisfied. An element is selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times, and the selected effect element is executed at each game time. In this way, even if the display continuation time determined for each game time is different, the effect elements having the same contents can be reliably executed in each game time.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the length of the display duration of the game times that are targets for executing the selected effect element is a length that allows the selected effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The selected effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times in the one game time.

  In Example 2 shown in FIG. 23B, the display duration T2 of the second game time P02 is twice or more as long as the time required for the effect element A (for example, the cut-in notice effect A). The pachinko machine 10 executes the same effect element A twice in the game time P02. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has the same out symbol A (for example, “1, 2”, etc.) after the end of the first effect element A in the second game time P02 and stopped in the first game time P01. The symbol pseudo stop effect is executed once to stop the “3” symbol combination) in a pseudo manner. For this reason, it is possible to further enhance the visual feeling given to the player.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, an effect element (hereinafter also referred to as an effect element for a visual notice notice) having the same content that is to be executed a plurality of times can be executed more times. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize the existing visual feeling. In addition, since the number of executions of the visual sensation effect element is increased or decreased depending on the length of the display duration of one game time, it is possible to give an inflection to the player's expectation.

  Furthermore, since the presentation element for the visual notice is a presentation element that can be executed within the shortest display duration among the display durations that can be determined for each game, the time required for one execution is 1 or less of the display duration of one game time. Therefore, even if the visual effect notice element is executed once in one game time, a surplus time may occur in the display duration time. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the length of the display duration of one game is a length that can execute the presentation element for the previous visual announcement (the production element having the same content) a plurality of times. In the one game time, the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, so that the surplus time of the display continuation time can be minimized.

  Note that, in the above example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the effect element A in all the consecutive game times until the game times related to the hold information determined to satisfy the conditions for generating the visual notice notice are satisfied. Although it is executed, the pachinko machine 10 only needs to execute the effect element having the same contents a plurality of times. For example, the effect element A may be executed only at the game time P01 and the game time P03.

  In the following, in particular, when a specific notice effect is selected as an effect element that is executed multiple times with the same contents in the existing notice notice, the selected notice effect is also referred to as a “notice notice effect for existing notice notice”. In addition, when a symbol stop effect that completely stops or pseudo-stops a combination of specific symbols is selected as an effect element that is executed multiple times with the same content in the previous visual announcement, in the selected symbol stop effect A combination of specific symbols to be stopped or pseudo-stopped is also referred to as “stop symbol for pre-visit notice”.

A5-2. Control related to previous visual notice:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the above-described visual notice notice in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described.

  In step S1401, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling the command received from the main MPU 62 to be stored and read, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402.

  In step S1402, a command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command response processing will be described later. After executing Step S1402, the process proceeds to Step S1403.

  In step S1403, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process in step S1402. After executing step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

  In step S1404, a sound output control process for performing sound output control of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the command corresponding process in step S1402. After executing step S1404, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Command processing>
Next, command response processing will be described. The command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission controller 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 25: S1402).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing command response processing. As described above, in the command handling process, a process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the command corresponding processing will be described.

  In step S1501, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1501 that a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1502, and a hold command handling process is executed. In the hold command handling process, the above-described process relating to the visual notice notice is executed based on the information set in the hold command. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1501 that a hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503 without executing step S1502.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504, and the effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect executed in the current game round, a stop symbol, a variable display pattern, and the like are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1503: NO), the process proceeds to step S1505 without executing step S1504.

  In step S1505, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1505 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: YES), the process advances to step S1506 to execute an opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the type of jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the contents of the opening effect corresponding to the jackpot type are set, and information corresponding to the contents of the effect is set An opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1505 that an opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: NO), the process proceeds to step S1507 without executing step S1506.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether an ending command is received. If it is determined in step S1507 that an ending command has been received (S1507: YES), the process proceeds to step S1508 to execute an ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the game state after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the game state is set, and The ending effect command in which the corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that an ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1507: NO), the process proceeds to step S1509 without executing step S1508.

  In step S1509, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the production content corresponding to the opening command and the production content corresponding to the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, an effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102.

<Processing for pending command>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The pending command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 26: S1502).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the pending command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the pending command handling process will be described.

  In step S1601, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning a prize, the number of hold information acquired based on the winning to the first start port 33, the number of hold information acquired based on the win to the second start port 34, and these hold A process for enabling the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S1601 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of hold information acquired based on winning in the first start port 33 is also referred to as “first hold number”, and the number of hold information acquired based on winning in the second start port 34 is referred to as “first hold number”. Also referred to as “second reserved number”, the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing Step S1601, the process proceeds to Step S1602.

  In step S1602, confirmation processing is executed. In the confirmation process, a process is performed to enable the sound light side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the hold command that has been read this time corresponds to a jackpot, whether or not it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, and the like. Details of the confirmation processing in step S1602 will be described later. After executing step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1603, a visual notice advancement process is executed. In the pre-visual notice processing, the process for determining whether or not the above-described pre-visual notice generation condition is satisfied is executed, and when the pre-existence notice generation condition is satisfied, Executes the setting process to execute the feeling notice. Details of the existing notice notice processing in step S1603 will be described later. After executing step S1603, the pending command handling process is terminated.

<Renewal process at the time of winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning a prize will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1601) of the hold command handling process.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning. In step S <b> 1701, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S1701 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33 (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702, and the sound light is emitted. Update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the first start port 33. In the update process of the first reserved number counter area, the information in the first reserved number counter area is updated to the information on the number of held items included in the held command that has been read this time. After executing Step S1702, the process proceeds to Step S1704.

  If it is determined in step S1701 that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S1701: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that it is transmitted based on the winning to 34, the process proceeds to step S1703, and update processing of the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound side RAM 94 is executed. . The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 the number of reserved information acquired based on winning at the second start port 34. In the update process of the second reserved number counter area, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information on the reserved number included in the command to be read this time. After executing Step S1703, the process proceeds to Step S1704.

  The reason why the processes in steps S1702 and S1703 are performed as described above will be described. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not. For this reason, when the power supply is shut off in a situation where the hold information related to winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 stores the hold information. While stored and held, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, if the configuration in which the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area is counted up every time the hold command is received in the sound emission control device 90 is adopted, the main control device 60 actually holds the hold memory. Inconvenience may occur that the number of held information and the number of held information grasped by the sound emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of hold, and the voice light emission control device 90 receives the hold command every time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of reserved items included is set in the first reserved number counter area or the second reserved number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above disadvantages.

  In step S1704, update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. The total number-of-holds counter area is the sum of the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on winnings to the first start port 33 and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on winnings to the second start port 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In the update process, the information on the total reserved number counter area is the sum information of the reserved number information measured in the first reserved number counter area and the reserved number information measured in the second reserved number counter area. Update to After executing step S1704, the update process at the time of the final winning is terminated.

<Confirmation process>
Next, the confirmation process will be described. The confirmation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1602) of the pending command handling process. As described above, this confirmation process can be omitted when information such as whether or not the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot or the presence or absence of reach is already set in the hold command.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the confirmation process. As described above, the confirmation process is a process executed when it is determined that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the confirmation process will be described. The contents of each table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound side ROM 93 described in the following steps are the success / failure table storage area 63a, the distribution table storage area 63b of the main ROM 63, and This is the same as the contents of each table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c.

  In step S1801, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold command that is the current read target is grasped. Then, it progresses to step S1802 and it is determined whether the present winning lottery mode is a low probability mode. Specifically, when the high probability mode flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94, it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode, and when the high probability mode flag is stored. It is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode, that is, the high probability mode. The high probability mode flag is stored when a high probability mode command is received from the main MPU 62.

  If it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is the low probability mode (S1802: YES), the process proceeds to step S1803, and the low probability mode success / failure table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound side ROM 93 is displayed. refer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1805, where it is determined whether or not the value information of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the low probability mode success / failure table. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is not the low probability mode (S1802: NO), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the high probability mode success / failure table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound side ROM 93. Refer to Thereafter, the process advances to step S1805 to determine whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the high probability mode success / failure table.

  In step S1805, when it is determined that the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1805: YES), the process proceeds to step S1806, and the pending command to be read this time is displayed. Information on the value of the included jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1807, and the distribution table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Specifically, when the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on a winning to the first start port 33, the second start port allocation table is referred to, and the second If it is transmitted based on the winning at the start port 34, the second start port distribution table is referred to.

  In step S1808, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S1808 that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S1808: YES), the process proceeds to step S1809, and the probability variation jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1808 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S1808: NO), the process proceeds to step S1810, and the normal jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished.

  In step S1805, when it is determined that the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1805: NO), the process proceeds to step S1811, and the pending command to be read this time is displayed. The information of the value of the included reach random number counter C3 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1812, and the reach determination table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1813, where it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the reach random number counter C3 grasped this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach as a result of referring to the reach determination table.

  If it is determined in step S1813 that the reach is supported (S1813: YES), the process proceeds to step S1814, and the reach occurrence information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Then, this confirmation process is complete | finished. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1813 that the reach is not supported (S1813: NO), the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

<Pre-view notice processing>
Next, the already-notified visual notice process will be described. The pre-visibility notice processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1603) of the hold command response processing.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the already-notified visual notice process. In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S1901 that the pending command to be read this time has not been transmitted based on winning in the first starting port 33 (S1901: NO), that is, winning in the second starting port 34 If it is determined that the transmission is based on the process, the process advances to step S1902.

  In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the first existing visual notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94. The first visual notice flag is stored when the above-mentioned visual notice is started with the hold information based on the winning at the first start port 33 as an opportunity, and is deleted when the visual notice is ended. Flag to be

  If it is determined in step S1902 that the first visual notice flag is stored (S1902: YES), the process proceeds to step S1903, the first visual notice flag is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S1904. “0” is set in the counter area for the visual notice notice in the sound light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1905.

  If the counter for pre-visit notice is set to execute the pre-sensation notice, the sound-side MPU 92 specifies how many game times the pre-announce notice is to be executed thereafter. It is a measuring means for doing. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings is set in the previously-notified visual notice counter area, and is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time a new game is started. Then, when the information stored in the existing visual notice counter area after updating is the initial value “0”, the existing visual notice flag stored at that time is deleted.

  Here, when the hold command is transmitted based on the winning at the second starting port 34, in other words, when there is a winning at the second starting port 34, the first visual notice flag is displayed. The reason for erasing will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the hold information related to the winning at the second starting port 34 is subject to the jackpot lottery in preference to the holding information related to the winning at the first starting port 33. If there is a winning at the starting opening 34, the order of the lottery lottery of the hold information is changed, and the premise of the visual notice notice that has already been set with the winning at the first starting opening 33 is broken. End up. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when there is a winning at the second start port 34, the first visual notice flag is deleted by deleting the first visual notice flag. It was decided to cancel the execution.

  If it is determined in step S1902 that the first visual notice flag is not stored (S1902: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing steps S1903 and S1904.

  If it is determined in step S1901 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on a winning to the first start port 33 (S1901: YES), step S1902, step S1903, and step The process proceeds to step S1905 without executing S1904, that is, without deleting the first visual notice flag.

  In the processing from step S1905 to step S1911 to be described next, processing related to the jackpot hold flag is executed. Therefore, prior to the description of the processing from step S1905 to step S1911, the jackpot holding flag, the first erasing counter area and the second erasing counter area used for determining whether or not to delete the jackpot holding flag will be described. To do.

  The jackpot hold flag includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot in the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section or the hold area Rb for the second result display section of the main controller 60. If this is the case, it is information for specifying the sound light side MPU 92. In the situation where the big hit hold flag is stored, the big hit hold flag is erased in a state where both information stored in a first erase counter area and a second erase counter area described later are “0”. It is executed when

  The first erasure counter area is used for the first result display unit when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the first result display unit hold area Ra, and the hold information becomes a game round start target. This is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasure from the reserved area Ra by the sound light side MPU 92. As will be described later, the information on the number of holds set in the first erasure counter area is the hold information stored in the first result display section hold area Ra (that is, in the winning to the first start port 33). Each time the game time is newly started, the information is updated so that 1 is subtracted.

  The second erasure counter area is used for the second result display section when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the second result display section hold area Rb, and the hold information becomes a game round start target. This is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasure from the reserved area Rb by the sound light side MPU 92. As will be described later, the information on the number of holds set in the second erasure counter area is the hold information stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb (that is, in the winning to the second start port 34). Each time the game time is newly started, the information is updated so that 1 is subtracted. Hereinafter, the description returns to the processing related to the jackpot hold flag.

  In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is a hold command corresponding to the jackpot. If it is determined in step S1905 that the hold command that is the current read target is a hold command corresponding to the jackpot (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906, and the hold command that is the current read target is the first one. It is determined whether or not the transmission is based on a winning at the first start port 33.

  In step S1906, when it is determined that the hold command that is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S1906: YES), the process proceeds to step S1907, and this time In addition to specifying the information on the first hold number included in the hold command to be read, the specified information on the first hold number is set in the first erasure counter area. After executing Step S1907, the process proceeds to Step S1909.

  In step S1906, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S1906: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that the information has been transmitted based on the winning to 34, the process proceeds to step S1908 to specify the second reserved number information included in the command that is the current read target, 2 Information on the number of reservations is set for the second erasure counter area. After executing step S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909.

  In step S1909, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S1909 that the big hit hold flag is stored (S1909: YES), the hold command handling process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1909 that the jackpot hold flag is not stored (S1909: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910, and the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound side RAM 94. After executing Step S1910, the process proceeds to Step S1912.

  If it is determined in step S1905 that the hold command that is the current read target is not a hold command corresponding to the jackpot (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1911, and the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot hold flag is not stored in the sound side RAM 94 (S1911: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot hold flag is stored in the sound side RAM 94 (S1911: YES), the hold command handling process is terminated as it is.

  As described in the processing from step S1905 to step S1911, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the big hit hold flag is already stored (S1909: YES, S1911: YES) Various settings to execute the notice are not made. Thereby, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is already stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section or the hold area Rb for the second result display section of the main control device 60, the first start port 33 or the first Even if new hold information is acquired based on a winning at the 2 start opening 34, various settings for executing the visual notice notice are not performed.

  In step S1912, it is determined whether or not the first visual notice flag is stored in the sound side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S1912 that the first visual notice flag is stored (S1912: YES), the pending command handling process is terminated. That is, when the first visual notice notice flag is stored, the visual notice notice generation lottery process in step S19 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the first existing notice flag is not stored (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1913.

  In step S1913, it is determined whether or not the second visual notice flag is stored in the sound side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S1913 that the second existing notice flag is stored (S1913: YES), the pending command handling process is terminated. In other words, when the second already-notified notice notice flag is stored, the already-notified notice notice generation lottery process in step S1917 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1913 that the second existing notice flag is not stored (S1913: NO), the process proceeds to step S16.

  In other words, in a situation where it has already been set to execute the previous visual notice based on either the hold information relating to the winning at the first starting port 33 or the holding information relating to the winning at the second starting port 34. Even if a new hold command is received, no new setting for executing the visual notice notice is performed.

  In step S <b> 1914, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S1914 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33 (S1914: YES), the process proceeds to step S1915, and the total hold It is determined whether or not the number of reserved items measured in the number counter area is two or more.

  If it is determined in step S1915 that the total number of reserved items is two or more (S1915: YES), the process advances to step S1917 to execute the already-existing sensation notice generation lottery process. The details of the already-existing visual announcement occurrence lottery process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1915 that the total number of reserved items is not two or more (S1915: NO), the pending command handling process is terminated without executing the existing visual notice occurrence lottery process in step S1917. .

  In step S1914, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time is not transmitted based on the winning to the first start port 33 (S1914: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that the transmission is based on the winning to 34, the process proceeds to step S1916, and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved numbers measured in the second reserved number counter area is two or more. .

  If it is determined in step S1916 that the second reserved number is two or more (S1916: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917, and the already-existing sensation notice generation lottery process is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1916 that the second reserved number is not two or more, the present notice notice process is terminated without executing the existing notice notice generation lottery process in step S1917.

  In other words, when the hold command that is the object of reading this time is transmitted based on a winning to the first start port 33, the previous notice of visual acuity only when the total number of holds is 2 or more. The generation lottery process is executed. On the other hand, when the hold command to be read this time is transmitted based on winning in the second start port 34, the existing feeling is only when the second hold number is two or more. The notice generation lottery process is executed. The reason for this is that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the visual notice notice using two or more game times. In the case where the hold command is transmitted based on a winning to the second start opening 34, the reason for using the second hold number as a reference is the second start opening 34 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This is because the hold information acquired by winning the prize is subject to the big win lottery in preference to the hold information acquired by winning the first start port 33.

<Presentation notice generation lottery processing>
Next, the noticeable visual notice occurrence lottery process will be described. The already-notice-visit notice generation lottery process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the already-notice-notice notice process (FIG. 30: S1917).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the already-notified sight notice occurrence lottery process. In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the pending command to be read this time corresponds to jackpot or reach occurrence. If it is determined in step S2001 that neither the big hit nor the reach occurrence is supported (S2001: NO), the existing visual notice occurrence lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that it corresponds to the jackpot or reach occurrence (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, and the random number counter for visual acuity notice from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound side RAM 94 is displayed. A value (numerical information) is read out, and the previously-noticed notice occurrence table stored in the already-noticed notice occurrence table storage area 93b of the sound-side ROM 93 is referred to. It is determined whether or not the random number counter value corresponds to the previous visual announcement occurrence winning.

  In addition, the probability of winning the existing visual announcement occurrence can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when a hold command corresponding to the jackpot is received, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to refer to the jackpot notice notification generation table for the jackpot, and the jackpot notice for the jackpot. The advance notice generation table is set to win the hold advance notice with a probability of 7/10. On the other hand, when a hold command corresponding to the occurrence of reach is received, the table is configured to refer to the reach notice occurrence table for reach, and the reach notice occurrence table for reach is 10 minutes. It is set so that the holding notice is generated with a probability of 1.

  In step S2003, when it is determined that the existing visual announcement random number counter value does not correspond to the existing visual announcement occurrence winning (S2003: NO), the existing visual announcement generation lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2003 that the pre-announcement notice random number counter value corresponds to the pre-announcement notice occurrence selection (S2003: YES), the preexistence notice generation condition has been satisfied. The process proceeds to step S2004.

  In step S2004, a notice effect determination process for the visual notice notice is executed. More specifically, the random number counter value (numeric information) for the notice effect is read out from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound side RAM 94 and is stored in the notice effect notice table storage area 93 c for the existing notice notice in the sound side ROM 93. Referring to the existing visual notice notice effect table for the visual notice notice, the notice effect for the visual notice notice corresponding to the random number counter value for the notice effect is determined. In the notice effect table for the visual announcement, the content of the notice effect that can be executed within the shortest display duration among the display durations stored in the display duration table of the main ROM 63, and the random counter for the notice effect Values are stored in association with each other. In the present embodiment, the notification effect for the previous notice is determined using the notice effect random number counter value determined by the lottery and the existing notice notice table for the previous notice notice. The predetermined notification effect may be used as the notification effect for the visual notification. In this case, the predetermined predetermined notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed within the shortest display duration of the display durations stored in the display duration table of the main ROM 63. In addition, for example, the notice effect for the previous visual notice this time is the notice effect A, and the notice effect for the existing visual notice to be determined when the condition for generating the previous visual notice is satisfied next time is the notice effect B. In addition, the order of the notice effects for the already-notified visual notice to be determined may be set in advance. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 can adopt various methods to intentionally and actively determine the type and content of the notice effect for visual notice that is executed in each game round.

  After executing step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, and the type information of the determined notice notice effect for the existing notice is stored in the notice notice notice area for existing notice notice area 94d in the sound side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In step S2006, a stop symbol determination process for an existing visual notice is executed. Specifically, the stop symbol random number counter value (numerical information) is read from the lottery counter area 94 c of the sound side RAM 94 and is stored in the stop visual table stop memory table storage area 93 d of the sound side ROM 93. The stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol random number counter value is determined with reference to the existing visual alert stop symbol table. Note that the stop symbol for the detachment result is determined as the stop symbol for the previous visual notice. After executing step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007, and the determined stop symbol type information for the visual notice notice is stored in the sound side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S2008 that the hold command that is the current read target has been transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33 (S2008: YES), the process proceeds to step S2009, and the sound light The first existing visual notice flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the side RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S2010, and the information stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is set in the existing visual notice counter area of the sound light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the pre-visibility notice processing is terminated. As a result, it is set to a state in which the visual notice notice should be executed with the hold information relating to the first start port 33 as a trigger.

  In step S2008, if it is determined that the hold command that is the current reading target is not transmitted based on winning in the first start port 33 (S2008: NO), the process proceeds to step S2011, and the sound side The second existing visual notice flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S2012, and the information stored in the second reserved number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is set in the existing visual notice counter area of the sound light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the pre-visibility notice processing is terminated. As a result, it is set to a state in which the visual notice notice should be executed with the hold information relating to the second start port 34 as a trigger.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command response process (FIG. 26: S1504).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the contents of the effect executed in the current game round. . Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described.

  In step S2101, the variation command received this time is read out, information on the presence / absence of reach and display duration information is specified from the command, and the type command received this time is read out, and the 16R probability variation big hit is read from the command. Information on the result of the jackpot lottery such as information, information on the 8R probability variation jackpot, information on the 16R regular jackpot, information on the 8R regular jackpot, or information on the outage result is specified. In step S2101, from the above identified information, information on whether or not the jackpot is won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not reach occurs if the jackpot is not won, and display duration And the obtained information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. After executing Step S2101, the process proceeds to Step S2102.

  In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the visual notice flag is stored in the sound side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S2102 that the existing visual notice flag is stored (S2102: YES), that is, if the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2103, where An effect setting process corresponding to the notice is executed. In this process, in the present game round in which the previous visual notice is executed, the previous visual notice effect determined in S2004 of FIG. 31 is executed, and the previous visual notice determined in S2006 of FIG. 31 is executed. It is set so as to execute a symbol stop effect using a stop symbol for use. Details of the effect setting process corresponding to the previous visual notice will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S2102 that the existing visual notice flag is not stored (S2102: NO), the process proceeds to step S2104 to execute a notice effect generation lottery process. In the notice effect generation lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the normal notice effect is executed in the current game round. Normal notice effect can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but when reach display is performed than when reach display is not performed Is set to occur with high probability. In addition, in the notice effect generation lottery process, the game times corresponding to the jackpot are more likely to generate the notice effects than the game times corresponding to the losing result, and more likely to generate the notice effects having a low appearance rate. A lottery will be held. After executing Step S2104, the process proceeds to Step S2105.

  In step S2105, it is determined whether or not a notice effect generation has been won as a result of the notice effect generation lottery process in step S2104. If it is determined in step S2105 that the announcement effect has been won (step S2105: YES), the process proceeds to step S2106, and the selected announcement effect is set to be executed in the current game round. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the announcement effect has not been won (step S2105: NO), the process proceeds to step S2107 without executing step S2106.

  In step S2107, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol on the active line L Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as information on the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game round is 16R probability variation jackpot or 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same An even number of symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selection ratio is the same for the same odd symbol combination and the same even symbol combination, but instead the former is selected over the latter. A configuration with a higher rate may be used, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of “7” symbols is selected only in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the big hit lottery for the current game round is a missed result, the presence or absence of reach is determined from the contents of the change command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L and corresponds to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is established on the effective line L. Information is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established on the effective line L Corresponding information is set as information on the current stop symbol. After executing Step S2107, the process proceeds to Step S2108.

  In step S2108, processing for determining a variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, information on the display duration of the current game time is specified from the contents of the command for fluctuation received this time, information on the display duration, information on the variable display time included in the display duration, Then, the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the stop symbol information specified in step S2107 is selected. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to.

  After performing the effect setting process corresponding to the previous visual notice in step S2103, or after setting the variable display pattern in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

  In step S2109, the type information of the notice effect, the number of executions of the notice effect, the type information of the stop symbol, and the type information of the variable display pattern set in the current game time are set in the effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2110 to transmit the effect command to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for causing the symbol display device 41 to display the content of the effect corresponding to the received effect command. After executing step S2110, the process proceeds to step S2111. After executing the update process at the start of fluctuation, the effect setting process ends. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Direction setting process corresponding to previous visual notice>
Next, an effect setting process corresponding to the visual notice notice will be described. The effect setting process corresponding to the visual notice notice is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S2103) of the effect setting process.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process corresponding to a previous visual notice. As described above, the present setting process is a process that is executed when the current game time is one of a plurality of game times for executing the visual notice notice, and is executed in the current game time. This is a process for setting a notice effect, a symbol stop effect, and a variable display pattern. Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the setting process will be described.

  In step S2201, the type information of the pre-announcement advance notice effect stored in the pre-visit notice advance notice storage area 94d of the sound side RAM 94 is grasped. After that, the process proceeds to step S2202, and the stop symbol type information for the visual notice notice stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2203.

  In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the existing visual notice counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is “1”. In other words, it is determined whether or not the game times executed this time are game times related to the hold information in which the condition for generating the visual alert is satisfied. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game times related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the visual notice are the game times related to the jackpot or reach occurrence. Therefore, in the case of the game times related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice, a relatively long display duration is set.

  In step S2203, when it is determined that the value stored in the existing visual notice counter area is not “1” (S2203: NO), that is, the game times to be executed this time indicate that the visual notice notice generation condition is If it is not the game times related to the hold information that has been satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2204, and within the display time of the game times that are executed this time, the notice effect for the existing visual acuity noticed in step S2201 can be executed a plurality of times. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S2204 that the notice effect for the existing visual notice cannot be executed a plurality of times within the display continuation time (S2204: NO), the process proceeds to step S2205 and the notice effect for the existing visual notice is set to 1. Set to run once. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2208.

  If it is determined in step S2204 that the notice presentation effect for the existing sight notice can be executed a plurality of times within the display duration (S2204: YES), the process proceeds to step S2206, and the notice effect for the existing sight notice is provided. Set to run multiple times. Specifically, when the notice effect for the previous notice notice can be executed twice within the display duration time, the notice notice effect is set to be executed twice, and the existing notice effect is given within the display duration time. If the notice effect for the notice can be executed three times, the notice effect is set to be executed three times. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is set so that the notice effect for the visual notice notice is executed up to three times per game. However, the maximum number of notice effects executed in one game time may be set to one or two times, or may be set to four times or more.

  In addition, the number of executions of the notice effect for the previous notice notice in the current game time within the display continuation time is M times, and the actual execution number of the notice effect for the previous notice notice in the current game time is N. In the case of times, the relationship between M and N is not limited to M = N. If N satisfies the relationship of M ≧ N ≧ 1, the value can be arbitrarily set. For example, if the number of executions of the notice effect for the existing notice notice within the display duration of this game is five, the actual number of executions of the notice effect for the existing notice notice is five times or more. It can be arbitrarily set within one range. The value of N can be determined by various methods such as determination by lottery or determination using table data in which M and N are associated. In this way, the number of executions of effect elements having the same content can be determined intentionally and actively.

  After executing step S2206, the process proceeds to step S2207, and in the current game round, after executing the notice effect for the notice of existing feeling, the stop pattern for the notice of existing notice obtained in step S2202 is pseudo-stopped. It is set to execute the symbol pseudo stop effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2208.

  After step S2205 or step S2207 is executed, in step S2208, the stop symbol for the previous visual announcement grasped in step S2202 is set as the stop symbol in the current game round. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2212.

  In step S2203, when it is determined that the value stored in the existing visual notice counter area is “1” (S2201: YES), that is, the game time executed this time is the condition for generating the existing visual notice notice. In the case of the game times related to the hold information that is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2209 to set the notice effect for the previous notice notice to be executed once, and the suggested effect, battle effect, jackpot or A result presentation corresponding to the outlier result is set to be executed in the current game round. As described above, the game times related to the hold information in which the conditions for generating the visual notice are satisfied are game times related to jackpot or reach occurrence, and thus a relatively long display duration is set. When selecting each type of suggestion effect, battle effect, and result effect, subtract the time required for the notice effect for the previous visual announcement from the display duration set in this game round. Select a combination of effects that can be performed. After executing Step S2209, the process proceeds to Step S2210.

  In step S2210, in the current game round, after executing the notice notice effect for the existing visual notice, the design false stop effect for executing the stop notice design for the existing visual notice obtained in step S2202 in a pseudo manner is executed. Set to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2211.

  In step S2211, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is set. The details of the stop symbol setting process are the same as the process in step S2107 of FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2212.

  In step S2212, a process for determining a variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, information on the display duration of the current game time is specified from the contents of the command for fluctuation received this time, information on the display duration, information on the variable display time included in the display duration, And the variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of the stop symbol information for the visual notice notice specified in step S2202 is selected. In selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S2212, the setting process ends.

<Update process at the start of change>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of variation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine for the effect setting process (FIG. 32: S2111).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an update process at the start of fluctuation. In the processing from step S2301 to step S2311, which will be described below, as the game times start, the counter values in the various holding number counter areas are updated, and processing related to erasing the big hit holding flag is executed.

  As already described, the jackpot holding flag is a jackpot in the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit or the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the main controller 60. This flag is stored when the corresponding hold information is included. In addition, in the first erasure counter area, when hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored, the order in which the hold information becomes the start target of the game times in the first result display portion hold area Ra. Information for specifying whether or not is stored. In addition, in the second erasure counter area, when hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored, the order in which the hold information is the start target of the game times in the second result display portion hold area Rb Information for specifying whether or not is stored. Therefore, when both the value of the first erasing counter area and the value of the second erasing counter area are “0” as the initial value, the first result display area holding area Ra of the main control device 60 or This means that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is not included in the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section. In this case, the jackpot hold flag is erased. Hereinafter, the process of each step executed in the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described.

  In step S2301, the information of the total reserved number counter area is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2302 that the command is the first variation command (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303, and the reserved number stored in the first reserved number counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thus, the information of the first reserved number counter area is updated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2304.

  In step S2304, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the first erasure counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is 1 or more. If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is 1 or more (S2304: YES), the process proceeds to step S2305, and the value stored in the first erasure counter area. The information in the first erasing counter area is updated so that 1 is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is not 1 or more (S2304: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2305 and 09 to S2311.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the command is not the first variation command (S2302: NO), that is, if the variation command received this time is the second variation command, the process proceeds to step S2306, and the sound side RAM 94 The information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the reserved number stored in the second reserved number counter area is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the second erasure counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is “1” or more. If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is 1 or more (S2307: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308, and the value stored in the second erasure counter area. The information in the second erasure counter area is updated so that 1 is subtracted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is not 1 or more (S2307: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312, without executing steps S2308 and 09 to S2311.

  In step S2309, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the first erasing counter area is “0”. If it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is “0” (S2309: YES), the process proceeds to step S2310. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is not “0” (S2309: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2310 and S2311. .

  In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the second erase counter area is “0”. If it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is “0” (S2310: YES), the process proceeds to step S2311 and the jackpot hold flag is erased. That is, when the value stored in the first erasing counter area is “0” and the value stored in the second erasing counter area is “0”, the jackpot holding flag is erased. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is not “0” (S2310: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2311.

  In the processing from step S2312 to step S2317, which will be described next, processing related to erasure of the existing visual notice flag is executed. Specific processing will be described below.

  In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the existing visual notice counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is “1” or more. If it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the existing visual notice counter area is not equal to or greater than “1” (S2312: NO), the updating process at the start of this variation is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the existing visual notice counter area is equal to or greater than “1” (S2312: YES), the process proceeds to step S2313.

  In step S2313, the information in the existing notice counter area is updated so that the value stored in the existing notice counter area in the sound side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2314.

  In step S2314, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the existing visual notice counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is “0”. If it is determined in step S2314 that the value stored in the already-visited notice counter area is not “0”, the update process at the start of this variation is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value stored in the counter-visit counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2315.

  In step S2315, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2315 that the command is the first change command, the process proceeds to step S2316, and the first existing notice notice flag in the sound light side RAM 94 is deleted. Thereafter, the update process at the start of this change is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2315 that it is not the first variation command, that is, if the variation command received this time is the second variation command, the process proceeds to step S2317, and the second observation of the sound side RAM 94 is performed. Clear the feeling notice flag. Thereafter, the update process at the start of this change is terminated.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the sound emission control device 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the V interrupt process by quickly reflecting the contents of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S2401, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized, and the process of clearing the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. The compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2402.

  In step S2402, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process thereafter executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed every time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Command interrupt processing>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. In step S2501, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instruction.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction for the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information is stored. Hereinafter, details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S2601, command response processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 36) are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, image drawing and display control are started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the presentation operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24. If it is determined that it is a reception period for pressing the presentation operation button 24, the presentation operation is performed. Image rendering and display control are started so that an effect mode corresponding to pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the period for accepting the pressing of the presentation operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S2601), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp effects such as a notice effect and a stop symbol set by the sound emission control device 90, and display an effect image corresponding to the effect. Image rendering can be controlled to be displayed on the device 41.

  In step S2602, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command handling process (S2601) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2603.

  In step S2603, task processing is executed. In the task processing, based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S2602), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. In addition to specifying, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2604, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S2603) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes image drawing processing based on these pieces of information, and also displays the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt processing on the symbol display device 41 together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2605, and after executing other processes, the V interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, so that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times for the player. It is possible to give a visual feeling (dejab). The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences winning the jackpot after the same content element is executed multiple times, the effect element is executed in the hope that the same content element will be executed multiple times. Every time they are done, they will always pay attention to the production elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type and content of the effect elements to be executed a plurality of times when the conditions for occurrence of the existing visual notice are satisfied and the existing visual notice is to be executed are intended. Can be set automatically. It is also possible to intentionally set the number of executions of effect elements having the same content. Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to arbitrarily set the occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) of the existing visual notice when a big hit is won or a reach occurs.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may increase the number of effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times as time passes. Specific examples will be described below with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an example in which the number of effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times is increased as time passes. In the example shown in FIG. 38, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A in the first game time P01 and also executes the effect element A in the next game time P02. The number of elements is one. The pachinko machine 10 further executes the effect element B in addition to the effect element A at the game time P02, and also executes the effect element A and the effect element B at the next game time P03. The number of content production elements is two. That is, the pachinko machine 10 increases the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times as time passes. In this way, the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with time, so that the player's sense of expectation can be increased with time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 38, the control for increasing the number of effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times has been described. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's expectation by increasing / decreasing the number of performance elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and gives an expectation to the player's expectation. Can give change.

B. Second embodiment:
Next, a second embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content related to the visual notice notice. In the following description, the visual notice notice that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  FIG. 39 is a time chart illustrating an example of a visual notice notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. FIGS. 39A and 39B show Example 1 and Example 2 which are two examples of the visual notice notice in the present embodiment.

  In Example 1, when the total reserved number CRN is 2, the game ball is won at the first start port 33 and the total reserved number CRN becomes 3, and the hold information related to the winning indicates the condition for generating the visual notice notice. The case where it satisfy | fills is shown. That is, the game time P03 shown as the third game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice.

  In the case where the hold information related to the game time P03 satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice notice, the pachinko machine 10 has a game time before the game time P03 related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice notice. The contents of the game effect A executed in P01 are stored. That is, the pachinko machine 10 stores the contents of the game effect A to be executed at the game time P01 to be executed after the determination that the hold information of the game time P03 satisfies the occurrence of the previous visual notice. The game times P02 are game times after the game time P01 in which the contents of the game effect A are stored, and are game times before the game time P03 related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the visual notice notice. In game time P03, the contents of the game effect A stored in the game time P01 are reproduced.

  In the first embodiment, the “effect element” having the same content is executed a plurality of times as a visual notice, but in the present embodiment, it consists of a combination of effect elements executed in the game times P01. The “game effect” is executed multiple times as one unit. That is, the same game effect as the game time P01 is reproduced as it is for a certain period in each game time of the game time P02 and the game time P03. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to give a visual feeling suitably to a player.

  Further, in the game time P03, after executing the game effect A, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (in this example, the victory effect) are executed as in the first embodiment. Then, after the jackpot symbol is stopped in the game time P03, the jackpot effect is executed.

  Specific processing will be described. When it is determined that the hold information related to the game time P03 satisfies the conditions for generating the visual acuity notice, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the game effect A for the game effect A of the game time P01 to be executed thereafter. Various setting data for storing are stored. The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware such as various lamps 47 that actually executes effects, command setting data to be transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like.

  After the game time P01 is finished, the sound emission control device 90, when starting the game time P02, on the basis of various setting data for executing the game effect A stored, The lamp 47 and the speaker 46 are controlled. Immediately before the start of the game time P02, the game effect B to be executed is determined based on the hold information relating to the game time P02. However, the sound emission control device 90 does not provide the game effect B when the game time P02 is started. The game effect A is preferentially executed without being executed in a manner that appears in the behavior of the wear. The processing based on the setting data of the game effect B is executed as an internal process within a range that does not appear in the behavior of hardware (such as various lamps 47 and the speaker 46) that executes the game effect.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, when the display duration of the game time P02 is longer than the time for executing the game effect A, the sound emission control device 90 plays the game at the game time P02. At the same time as the execution of the effect A, the process based on the setting data of the game effect B, which has been executed as an internal process within a range that does not appear as a hardware behavior, is switched to a process that appears as a hardware behavior. That is, in the game times P02, after the game effect A is executed, the player recognizes that the game effect B is executed halfway. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 executes the visual notice notice shown in Example 1.

  Next, Example 2 of the previous visual notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Example 2, as in Example 1, the game ball is won at the first start port 33 at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 2, and the total reserved number CRN becomes 3, and the reserved information related to the winning is already viewed. This shows the case where the conditions for generating a sensation notice are satisfied. That is, the game time P13 shown as the third game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice notice.

  In Example 2, the sound emission control device 90 stores the contents of the game effect C1, which is a game effect for a part of the game effect C0 executed in the game time P11. The game times P12 are game times after the game times P11 in which the contents of the game effect C1 are stored, and are the game times before the game times P13 related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the visual notice. And in game time P13, the contents of the stored game effect C1 are reproduced. Specifically, since the display continuation time of the game time P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 plays a game during a part of the game effect C1 stored in the game time P12. The game effect C1a that is the effect is reproduced. On the other hand, since the display continuation time of the game time P13 is longer than the time required to execute the game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 reproduces the entire contents of the stored game effect C1 in the game time P13. Further, in the game time P13, after the game effect C1 is executed, an suggestion effect, a battle effect, and a result effect (in this example, a victory effect) are executed. Then, after the jackpot symbol is stopped in the game time P03, the jackpot effect is executed.

  As a specific process, when it is determined that the hold information related to the game time P13 satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice, the sound emission control device 90 executes the game executed after the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied. Various setting data for executing a game effect C1 that is a game effect during a part of the game effect C in the time P11 is stored. The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware such as various lamps 47 that actually executes effects, command setting data to be transmitted to the display control device 100, and the like. In the present embodiment, when the length (time) of the game effect to be stored is set in advance, the display duration of the game effect C0 is longer than the set length, so a part of the game times C0 is stored. A game effect C1 that is a game effect of the period is stored.

  Furthermore, since the display continuation time of the game time P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the stored game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 is a part of the stored game effect C1 in the game time P12. The game effect C1a is reproduced. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 performs the visual notice notice shown in Example 2.

  In the above description, by storing the setting data transmitted to the display control device 100 by the sound emission control device 90, the game effect executed at the game time P01 is reproduced in the game times after the game time P01. However, the display control device 100 stores the moving image data reproduced by the symbol display device 41 in the game time P01 as it is in the buffer, and the stored moving image data is again subjected to display control in the game times after the game time P01. The apparatus 100 may transmit to the symbol display apparatus 41 and reproduce it.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the contents of the executed game effects are stored and reproduced, at least in part of the period, the game effects having the completely same contents are played. Will experience. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a favorable visual feeling.

  Similarly to the first embodiment, the player who has recognized the existing visual sense may have a special meaning for the existing visual sense, for example, a privilege may be given. Have a sense of expectation. When a player experiences that a privilege is granted after a game effect with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the game effect is executed in anticipation that a game effect with the same content is executed a plurality of times. Every time you play, you will pay attention to the game production with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not a game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to suitably increase the player's degree of attention to the sequentially executed game effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the same suggested effect that suggests to the player that a game effect having the same content has been reproduced. It is executed after the game production of the contents of is reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game effect with the same content has been reproduced, and to convince the player that the reproduction of the game effect with the same content has a special meaning. be able to.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment may not select an operation acceptance effect including contents suggesting acceptance of an input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as a game effect target to be stored and reproduced. When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select an operation acceptance effect as a game effect that is the object to be stored and reproduced, it is possible to suppress execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give the player a certain visual feeling.

C. Third embodiment:
Next, a third embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content related to the visual notice notice. In the following description, the visual notice notice that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a time chart illustrating an example of a visual notice notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. FIGS. 40A and 40B show Example 1 and Example 2 which are two examples of the visual notice notice in the present embodiment. In Example 1, when the total reserved number CRN is 3, the game ball is won at the first start port 33 and the total reserved number CRN becomes 4, and the hold information related to the winning indicates the condition for generating the visual notice notice. The case where it satisfy | fills is shown. That is, the game time P04 shown as the fourth game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice notice.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in Example 1, when the hold information related to the game time P04 satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice notice, the pachinko machine 10 is continuously connected before the game time P04 related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice notice. A total time of the shortest display continuation times that can be determined as the display continuation times T1, T2, T3, and T4 of the game times P01, the game times P02, the game times P03, and the game times P04, which are the plurality of game times, is calculated. The display duration time of each game times P01 to P04 actually determined is Tre (Tre = T1 + T2 + T3 + T4), and the shortest display duration time that can be determined as the display duration time of each game time P01 to P04. Assuming that the total time is Tsum, the relationship of Tsum ≦ Tre is established.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 displays the production elements having the same contents that can be executed a plurality of times within the calculated total time Tsum until the game times P04 related to the hold information satisfying the conditions for generating the visual notice are completed. Run multiple times. In the example 1 shown in FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10 has the same contents that can be executed a plurality of times within a time Tsum that is equal to or less than the time Tre that is the display continuation time of the game times P01 to P04 actually determined. A, effect element B, and effect element C are executed. Further, in the game times P04, after the game effect A is executed, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the result effect (in this example, the victory effect) are executed.

  The pachinko machine 10 of Example 1 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice within the time Tsum. More specifically, the effect elements to be executed a plurality of times, such as effect element A at first, effect element A and effect element B, then effect element A, effect element B and effect element C, etc. The number of effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times is increased as time passes.

  Moreover, as shown in the drawing, in the pachinko machine 10 of Example 1, the effect element A executed for the second time, the third time, and the fourth time is executed across the game times. That is, the timing at which the variable display of symbols stops is different from the timing at which one rendering element A ends. Hereinafter, a description will be given with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display surface 41a when the previous visual notice is being executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the visual notice is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, symbol variation display and stop display are executed. The symbol variation display and the stop display in the display area 41aS are executed in the same cycle as the display duration of each game times P01 to P04.

  On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, display corresponding to the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C is performed. As the effect element A, for example, an effect element based on an image using the entire display area 41aL is displayed. More specifically, a moving image is displayed as a background image of the display area 41aL, or a moving image including a combination of a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image is displayed. As the effect element B and the effect element C, for example, a cut-in notice effect in which a predetermined image is displayed in front of a background image, an object notice effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed in front of a background image, and a background image are usually used. Background change notice effect that changes to a different aspect from the time, an accessory notice effect that causes a predetermined accessory to perform a predetermined action, a lamp light emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, and a symbol row with a predetermined scroll pattern Examples include a variation in the symbol sequence to be varied, and a reach effect in which the remaining one symbol sequence is varied in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot effect executed after the game time P04 is ended by displaying a moving image using the entire display surface 41a.

  As described with reference to FIG. 41, for example, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL, and the variable display and stop display of symbols in the display area 41aS and the effect elements in the display area 41aL are displayed. By executing the display in different cycles, the symbol variation display and stop display cycle (that is, the cycle synchronized with the actual display duration), the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C are executed. It becomes possible to make a mode different from a period.

  Next, Example 2 of the previous visual notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In Example 2, as in Example 1, the game ball is won at the first start port 33 at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 3, and the total reserved number CRN becomes 4, and the hold information related to the winning is already viewed. This shows the case where the conditions for generating a sensation notice are satisfied. That is, the game time P14 shown as the fourth game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice notice.

  In Example 2, the time required for the production element A, which is a target to be executed a plurality of times, is longer than the display duration of the game times P11. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes a single effect element A across game times. The pachinko machine 10 of Example 2 executes the effect element A as an effect element that can be executed three times within the shortest display duration total time Tsum that can be determined as the display duration of the four game times P11 to P14. . As shown in Example 2, the number of game times required to execute an effect element with the same content a plurality of times (in the example 2, 4 game times) and the number of executions of the effect element with the same content (Example 2) Then, the production element A may be different from 3 times). The types of effect elements that are executed a plurality of times as the same content and the number of executions thereof may be determined according to the value of the calculated total time Tsum. In this case, using the table data in which the total time Tsum is associated with the types and the number of executions of the production elements, the types of production elements to be executed a plurality of times as the same content and the number of executions thereof may be determined.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same contents that can be executed a plurality of times within the shortest display duration (Tsum) that can be determined as the display duration of each game time. Since the effect element is executed, one time of the effect element to be executed a plurality of times can be finished within the display continuation time (T1, T2, T3, T4) that is actually the time required for one game time. Not limited. That is, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game times related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice notice. As shown in Example 2, it is also possible to execute the effect element A, which is the object to be executed a plurality of times, across the game times. Therefore, it is possible to select an effect element to be executed a plurality of times without considering the relationship between the execution time for one effect element and the display continuation time for one game time.

  Furthermore, the same content effect element that can be executed a plurality of times in the total display time (Tsum) of the shortest display duration that can be determined is executed a plurality of times, so that the same content effect element is executed a plurality of times. The time required is less than or equal to the total display duration (Tre) of the actual game times. Therefore, there is a shortage of time when a production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game times related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating the visual notice notice. It is possible to avoid and reliably execute the production element having the same contents a plurality of times.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, since the same content effect element is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player has already seen that the same content effect element is executed a plurality of times. A feeling (dejab) can be given. The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. When a player experiences that a bonus has been granted after a production element with the same content is executed multiple times, the production element is executed in anticipation that the production element with the same content is executed multiple times. Every time, the attention is paid to the production elements with high expectations. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 40A and 40B, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the same suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been reproduced. It is executed after the production element of the content of is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and that the effect that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. Can be convinced.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment may not select an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of an input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation. Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not select an operation receiving effect element as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the effect elements having different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give the player a certain visual feeling.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 includes a combination of a display of a moving image as a background image of the display area 41aL and a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image as an effect element executed multiple times with the same contents. Video display, cut-in notice effect, notice effect by displaying an object image such as a predetermined character in front of the background image, background change notice effect that changes the background image to a different form from normal, reach effect, In addition, the player has already seen the player using various effect elements such as an effect by a physically operating accessory provided on the front door frame 14 or the game board 30, an effect by lighting or blinking with various lamps 47, etc. A feeling can be given. Therefore, the player's attention as to whether or not an effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times can be directed to various effect elements.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same contents that are executed a plurality of times. In Example 1 of this embodiment, the effect element A is executed first, the number of effect elements having the same content is one, and the game effect B is executed next, and the number of effect elements having the same content is two. Then, the effect element C is executed, and the number of effect elements having the same contents becomes three. In the present embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times, but control may be performed to reduce the number. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's expectation by increasing / decreasing the number of performance elements of the same content that are executed multiple times, and gives an expectation to the player. Can give change.

  Further, in Example 1 of the present embodiment, the presentation element A is first seen, such as production element A first, production element A and production element B, and then production element A, production element B, and production element C. The same content to be executed a plurality of times in the period after it is determined that the condition for generating a sensation notice is satisfied and until the game times (game times P04) related to the hold information that satisfies the conditions for generating a noticeable sight notice are completed. The number of production elements is increased over time. Therefore, since the number of performance elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

D. Fourth embodiment:
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content related to the visual notice notice. In the following description, the visual notice notice that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted. Hereinafter, specific processing in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a time chart showing an example of a visual notice notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In the first embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice based on the hold information is satisfied is made before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, it is determined whether or not the conditions for generating the visual notice based on the hold information are satisfied when the hold information is a target of the big hit lottery. That is, a determination as to whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice based on the hold information is satisfied and a jackpot lottery based on the hold information are performed immediately before the start of the game times P01 related to the hold information.

  Moreover, in 1st Embodiment, the execution of the presentation element of the same content was performed in multiple times over several game times as an embodiment of a visual notice notice. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, as the aspect of the visual notice, the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C that can be executed a plurality of times during the display duration of the game time are shown. The game is executed a plurality of times in one game time P01 related to the hold information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual notice notice. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A four times, the effect element B three times, and the effect element C twice in the game times P01. More specifically, the effect elements to be executed a plurality of times, such as effect element A at first, effect element A and effect element B, then effect element A, effect element B and effect element C, etc. The number of effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times is increased as time passes.

  As in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the effect element A a plurality of times for the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Run later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 executes a battle effect and a result effect (a victory effect) after executing the suggestion effect. Then, after the game time P01 ends, the jackpot effect is executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in at least one game time, an effect element that can be executed a plurality of times within the display time of the game time is the same content multiple times. Since this is executed, it is possible to give the player a visual sensation in one game. Further, as in the first embodiment, since the same content effect element is executed a plurality of times, the player is given a visual feeling (dejab) that the same content effect element is executed a plurality of times. Can be given. The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. To do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and that the effect that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times has a special meaning. Can be convinced.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment may not select an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of an input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation. Since the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not select an operation receiving effect element as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the effect elements having different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to give the player a certain visual feeling.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements having the same contents that are executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the effect element A is executed first, the number of effect elements having the same content is one, the game effect B is executed next, and the number of effect elements having the same content is two. The effect element C is executed and the number of effect elements having the same content is three. In the present embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times, but control may be performed to reduce the number. The pachinko machine 10 increases or decreases the player's expectation by increasing / decreasing the number of performance elements of the same content that are executed multiple times, and gives an expectation to the player. Can give change.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the effect element A is first performed, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B, and the effect element C are executed multiple times. The number of content elements is increased with the passage of time. Therefore, since the number of performance elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

E. Fifth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content related to the visual notice notice. In the following description, the visual notice notice that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  In the above embodiment, the display duration of each game time is not controlled based on the determination as to whether or not to execute the visual notice notice. In the present embodiment, when executing a visual notice notice, at least two game times out of the game times before the game times related to the hold information for which the condition for generating the visual notice notice is satisfied, Control is performed to ensure a display duration of a predetermined length. Then, in each game time in which the display duration of a predetermined length is secured, the effect elements having the same contents that can be executed within the secured display duration of the predetermined length are executed. This will be specifically described below.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of processing executed in the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the processing contents that the voice light emission control device 90 has executed as the hold command response processing in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device 60 executes a visual notice notice generation lottery process. Then, when the lottery for the occurrence of the previous visual announcement is won, for example, when the previous visual announcement is executed using three game times, the display duration of the three game times is determined for the existing visual feeling. A predetermined length is secured for execution of the notice. Specifically, in the main controller 60, when determining the display duration of each of the three game times for executing the visual notice notice, the value of the variation type counter CS for each of the three game times, In the collation with the display duration table stored in the display duration table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the visual acuity notice execution previously stored in the display duration table storage area 63d as a display duration table used for collation is performed. Display duration table for

  The main control device 60 controls and determines the display duration of the three game times to the length for execution of the existing visual notice, and then emits a sound using the information on the determined display duration of each game time as a command. It transmits to the control apparatus 90. The sound emission control device 90 determines the effect elements having the same contents that can be executed in the display continuation time of each game time for which the main control device 60 has secured the length for execution of the visual notice notice. In this way, it is possible to control the length of the display continuation time of the game times for the execution of the visual notice notice.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a display duration of a predetermined length is ensured and a display duration of a predetermined length is ensured for execution of the visual notice notice. Because the same effect elements that can be executed at each game time are executed, it is avoided that the time required to execute the same effect element is insufficient at each game time, and the same contents are ensured at each game time. The production elements can be executed.

  In addition, as an effect element used for the visual notice notice, a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and a background image Background change notice effect for changing to a mode different from the normal time, accessory notice effect for causing a predetermined accessory to execute a predetermined operation, lamp light emission effect for causing various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, and a symbol row with a predetermined scroll pattern Design variation variation effect, a reach effect that varies the remaining one symbol sequence in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line, and a symbol stop that stops a predetermined symbol combination Production and the like can be adopted. Since it is possible to give the player a visual sensation using various effect elements, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for various effect elements. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times as the visual notice notice is executed after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. To do. The player can recognize that an effect element with the same content has been executed multiple times, and that the player has a special meaning that the effect element with the same content has been executed multiple times. Can be convinced.

  Similarly to the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times. By changing the number of performance elements of the same content that are executed multiple times, the player's expectation can be changed, such as increasing or decreasing the player's expectation or giving an inflection to the expectation. it can.

  Furthermore, after the determination that the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, the same content that is executed a plurality of times in the period from the end of the game times related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice The number of elements may be increased over time. Since the number of performance elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with the passage of time, the player's expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, first, the display duration of each game time for executing the visual notice notice is determined first, and then the effect element to be executed as the visual notice notice based on the determined display duration is provided. Although it is determined, the present invention is not limited to such a processing form, and other processing forms can be adopted.

  For example, an effect element to be executed as a visual notice notice may be determined first, and then a display duration of a length capable of executing the effect element to be executed as a visual notice notice may be secured at each game time. . As a specific process, for example, when the main control device 60 determines the execution of the existing visual notice notice by performing the existing visual notice generation lottery process, first, the production of the same content executed as the existing visual notice notice is performed first. Determine the elements. After that, the main control device 60 secures a display continuation time of a length that can execute the effect element having the same contents as the visual notice notice in each game time. Then, the main control device 60 transmits the display duration of each game time for executing the visual notice and the contents of the effect element executed as the visual notice to the voice light emitting control device 90 as commands.

  By adopting such a processing mode, it is possible to secure a display continuation time of a length capable of executing the same effect element in each game time, so the time required to execute the same effect element However, it is possible to avoid the shortage in each game time, and to surely execute the effect elements having the same contents in each game time.

F. Sixth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information and the processing content related to the previous visual notice. In the following description, the visual notice notice that is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information, and also has a function of executing a time-linked effect element that is an effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the acquired time information. . In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes an RTC module (RTC: Real Time Clock), and acquires time information from the RTC module. The acquisition of the time information is not limited to the acquisition from the RTC module, and other methods that are technically possible for the acquisition of the time information, such as acquisition from the outside of the pachinko machine 10, may be employed.

  In the present description, among the effect elements executed by the pachinko machine 10, the effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the time information is referred to as a “time-linked effect element” and is based on the time information. An effect element that is executed without any action is referred to as a “non-time-linked effect element”.

  FIG. 44 is a time chart showing an example of a visual notice notice executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. 44 also shows a time-linked effect element executed by another pachinko machine of the same model as the pachinko machine 10 installed in the same game hall as the pachinko machine 10 as a comparison target.

  As shown in the drawing, the pachinko machine 10 and other pachinko machines start executing the time-linked effect element at time T0. Then, the pachinko machine 10 and other pachinko machines continuously execute the time-linked effect element as time passes. In the present description, other pachinko machines execute a series of preset time-linked effect elements. For convenience of explanation, in order to indicate the time position of a series of time-linked effect elements, a series of time-linked effect elements executed by other pachinko machines includes a time position as an index indicating the time position of the time-linked effect element. TP1 to TP20 are illustrated. Each time position shown in the figure is described in a form in which the symbol “TP” is omitted.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 wins a game ball in the first start port 33 at a timing when the total reserved number CRN is 3, and the total reserved number CRN becomes 4, and the hold information related to the winning is already viewed. This shows a case in which the conditions for generating a sensation notice are satisfied and the existing notice notice is executed. That is, the game time P04 shown as the fourth game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the visual notice notice.

  The pachinko machine 10 stores, as a specific temporal position, the temporal position TP of the time-linked effect element that is being executed at the timing at which the game time P01 is started after determining that the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied. . In the example shown in FIG. 44, the pachinko machine 10 stores the time position TP3 of the time-linked effect element as a specific time position. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is a game start that is executed after it is determined that the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and before the game number P04 related to the hold information that is determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual notice. The time at which the time-linked effect element is stored at a specific time position, triggered by the timing of starting each game time of game time P01, game time P02, game time P03, and game time P04 The target position TP3 is executed as a start position.

  Further, as shown in the figure, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and when the non-time-linked effect element is executed together with the time-linked effect element, the time-linked The effect element and the non-time-linked effect element are executed a plurality of times. And the pachinko machine 10 performs the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the same effect element has been executed a plurality of times after executing the effect elements (the time-linked effect element and the non-time-linked effect element) a plurality of times. To do. Then, after executing the suggestion effect, a battle effect and a result effect (a victory effect) are executed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can control the number of non-time-linked effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times is only the non-time interlocking effect element A in the game time P01, and the non-time interlocking effect element A, the non-time interlocking effect element B, and the game time P03 in the game time P02. Then, the non-time interlocking effect element A, the non-time interlocking effect element B, the non-time interlocking effect element C, the non-time interlocking effect element B, the non-time interlocking effect element C in the game time P04, and the like, The number of non-time interlocking effect elements having the same content executed a plurality of times is increased with the passage of time.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time-linked effect element that is executed at least in a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, so that an effect with a new interest can be given to the player. Can be provided. Further, since the time-linked effect element executed at least in a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, the player feels that the time-linked effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (dejab). Can be given. The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given.

  Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, the time-linked effect element is executed in anticipation that the time effect element is executed a plurality of times. Attention is always focused on the time-linked production element with a high expectation every time. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information, It is possible to improve the interest of games.

  When other pachinko machines having the same characteristics as the pachinko machine 10 are installed in the game hall, like the other pachinko machines shown in FIG. Even if the machine 10 and the pachinko machine that does not satisfy the condition for generating the visual notice notice, even if the same time-linked effect is started from the same time T0, the time-related difference in the time-linked effect element to be executed ( Shift). As a result, in addition to the player of the pachinko machine 10, the players of the surrounding pachinko machines recognize that the previous visual notification has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who is playing the game with the pachinko machine 10 that satisfies the conditions for generating the visual alert.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 executes the time-linked effect element having the time position TP3, which is a specific time position, as the start position in each game time of the game times P01 to P04. A strong visual sensation can be recognized for the portion after the temporal position TP3, which is a specific temporal position of the time-linked effect element. Further, the pachinko machine 10 synchronizes the start timing of the time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the start timing of each game time (game time P01 to game time P04), thereby providing a stronger visual acuity. Can be given to a person.

  In addition, if the start position of the time-linked effect element that starts at the timing of the start of each game is preliminarily set as a process for pre-visit notice, once among the time-linked effect elements, There is a possibility that an existing visual notice using a time-linked effect element is executed from a time position that is not executed. For example, when the setting is made to execute the time-linked effect element from a specific temporal position “TP10” every time triggered by the start timing of each game time of the game times P01 to P04, the game times P01 Until the first game time P01 of the game times P04 is started, the time-linked effect element that was executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) is the start of the first game time P01. The time-linked effect element is started and executed from a specific temporal position TP10 that has never been executed. In addition, the temporal positions TP3 to TP9 are not executed.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is executed at the timing when the game times P01 started after the time when the game times P04 is executed to determine that the visual notice notice generation condition is satisfied. The time position TP3 of the current time-linked effect element is stored as a specific time position, and the stored specific time position TP3 is executed a plurality of times (game time P02 to game time P04). Since it is set as the start position of the time-linked effect element, the second time and subsequent times of the time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times from once executed as a continuous series of time-linked effect elements (temporal positions TP1 to TP5). The temporal position TP3 can be set as the starting position of the. Therefore, the time-linked effect element that has been executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game time 01 of the game times P01 to P04 is started is It is possible to avoid sudden interruption at the start timing of the game times P01, and to avoid starting and executing a time-linked effect element from a specific temporal position TP10 that has never been executed. Moreover, all the parts (time positions TP1 to TP20) of the time interlocking effect element are executed, and the player can experience all the parts of the time interlocking effect element.

  Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the non-time-linked effect element in addition to the time-linked effect element, the pachinko machine 10 can give the player a stronger visual sensation. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can control the number of non-time interlocking effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. Therefore, by changing the number of non-time-related effect elements to be executed multiple times, changing the player's expectation, such as increasing / decreasing the player's expectation or giving an inflection to the expectation Can do. In the pachinko machine 10, the number of non-time-linked effect elements increases with the passage of time, so that the player's expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation acceptance effect element including the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times. When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not select an operation acceptance effect element as a non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times, so that it is possible to prevent the effect elements having different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. can do. Moreover, since the pachinko machine 10 performs the suggestion effect, the player can recognize that the effect elements (time-linked effect element, non-time-linked effect element) having the same contents have been executed a plurality of times. At the same time, it is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times.

G. Seventh embodiment:
The pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments has a configuration in which no operation receiving effect element is selected as an effect element for the existing visual notice, but the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with an existing visual notice. As a production effect element, there is a case where a button production which is one of the operation acceptance production elements may be selected. In the following, a description will be given of a case where the conditions for generating a visual notice are satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 selects a button effect as an effect element for the visual notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times.

<Example 1 of previous visual notice using button production>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as an effect element for the already-notified visual notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XA1, XA2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XA.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XA, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XA1 including the content suggesting that the player presses the effect operation button 24 (S2701). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode XA1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed and characters and images that prompt the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the production mode XA1 may be another mode.

  When the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after execution of the presentation mode XA1 (S2702: YES), the presentation mode XA1 and the presentation mode XA1 are triggered when the presentation operation button 24 is pressed. Executes a different rendering mode XA2 (S2703). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode XA2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, the production mode XA2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2702: NO), the production mode XA2 is not executed while the production mode XA1 is being executed.

  When the second button effect XA is started, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the effect mode XA1 as in the first button effect XA (S2704 or S2707). When the effect mode XA2 is executed when the first button effect XA is executed, after the effect mode XA1 is executed (S2704), there is a case where the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not. In any case (S2705), the effect mode XA2 is executed (S2706). Specifically, when the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2705: YES), the presentation mode XA2 is executed with the press of the presentation operation button 24 as a trigger ( S2706). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2705: NO), the production mode XA2 is executed when the predetermined time has passed (S2706).

  On the other hand, when the effect mode XA2 is not executed when the first button effect is executed, after the effect mode XA1 is executed (S2707), there is a case where the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not. In any case (S2708), the effect mode XA2 is not executed while the effect mode XA1 is being executed.

  When the second button effect XA is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XA having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). Production F is executed (S2709). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

  When button effect XA is executed three times or more, the same control as that when second button effect XA is executed is repeatedly executed, and suggestive effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XA. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the button effect XA a plurality of times as the effect element for the existing visual notice, when the effect mode XA2 is executed in the first button effect XA, the player inputs Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, if the effect mode XA2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XA, while the effect state X-like A2 is not executed in the first button effect XA, input by the player Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, the effect mode XA2 is not executed in the second and subsequent button effects XA. Therefore, even when the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XA executed at the first time and after the second time can be made the same. And similarly to said embodiment, the existing visual feeling (dejab) that the button effect XA of the same content was performed in multiple times can be given with respect to a player.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, the player can recognize that the button effect XA having the same contents has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the button effect XA of the contents is executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the presentation operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the presentation mode XA2 is triggered by the depression of the presentation operation button 24. Since this is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XA, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the player does not press the presentation operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the presentation mode XA2 is executed when the predetermined time has passed. can do. Furthermore, even if the player does not press the production operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the production mode XA2 is executed, so that an unexpectedness can be given to the game and the game can be improved. Can do. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XA2 at a predetermined timing without triggering the press of the effect operation button 24 or the elapse of a predetermined time.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a case in which the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and the button effect XA is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect XA is selected a plurality of times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time during which the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may depress the effect operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the presentation operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button presentations executed a plurality of times, and the button presentation with the same contents. Is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel the visual feeling for the button effect executed multiple times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual notice, the time parameter is not displayed, so that the player is less likely to feel the visual feeling. Can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and when the button effect is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display parameters.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied before the reservation information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and also generates the existing visual notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XA that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined that the condition for generating the visual notice notice is satisfied becomes the target of the big hit lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied when the hold information is a target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game time related to the hold information. The configuration may be such that XA is executed a plurality of times.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 may include a changing unit that changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when the button is pressed (that is, a mode that is depressed by pressing). The change means is a case where the presentation operation button 24 is not pressed (S2705: NO), and when the presentation mode XA2 is executed (S2706), the mode of the presentation operation button 24 is pressed. It is good to change to the aspect in a case. If such a change means is provided, since the mode of the production operation button 24 changes, it is possible to give the game an unexpectedness, and the production mode XA2 is displayed even though the production operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be executed. The changing means can be realized, for example, by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA may be executed based on whether the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times pressed. .

  In the above example, the presentation operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving unit that receives an input operation by the player. However, the operation receiving unit is not limited thereto. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player forward / backward or left / right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. shall be adopted. Can do. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XA will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where the button effect XA is executed as an effect element (notification effect) for the existing visual notification. In step S2801, it is determined whether or not the first execution completed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94. The first-execution completed flag has already been executed once for the previous notice notice (button effect XA) after the existing notice notice flag is stored, that is, after the condition for generating the existing notice notice is satisfied. This is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 whether or not it has been completed.

  When it is determined in step S2801 that the first execution completed flag is not stored (S2801: NO), that is, after the visual notice notice flag is stored, the button effect XA is not executed once. In step S2802, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are caused to execute the effect mode XA1 described above. The effect aspect XA1 includes contents that suggest pressing the effect operation button 24 to the player. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2803.

  In step S2803, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S2803 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2803: YES), the process proceeds to step S2804, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are described above. The production mode XA2 is executed. After executing step S2804, the process proceeds to step S2805, and the button press flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. The button press flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XA is executed. After executing Step S2805, the process proceeds to Step S2807.

  If it is determined in step S2803 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2803: NO), the process proceeds to step S2806, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2806: NO), the process returns to step S2803 to determine whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2806: YES), that is, if the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, step S2804 and step S2805 are not executed, and step S2806 is performed. The process proceeds to S2807.

  In step S2807, after the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, the first button effect XA is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2801 that the initial execution flag has been stored (S2801: YES), that is, if the button effect XA has already been executed at least once after the visual notice flag has been stored. Advances to step S2808 to cause the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XA1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2809.

  In step S2809, it is determined whether or not a button press flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94. When it is determined in step S2809 that the button press flag is not stored (S2809: NO), that is, when the first button effect XA is executed, when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed, Proceeding to step S2810, waiting until a predetermined time elapses, and after the predetermined time elapses, the second and subsequent button effects XA are terminated without executing the effect mode XA2 (step S2812).

  If it is determined in step S2809 that the button press flag is stored (S2809: YES), that is, when the first button effect XA is executed, the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In step S2811, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed in the button presentation XA currently being executed.

  If it is determined in step S2811 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2811: YES), the process proceeds to step S2812, and the effect mode XA2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means. Is executed, the second and subsequent button effects XA are terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2811 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2811: NO), the process proceeds to step S2813, where it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2813: NO), the process returns to step S2811, and it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2813: YES), that is, if the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S2812, and the symbol display as the effect execution means is performed. After causing the device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to perform the effect mode XA2, the second and subsequent button effects XA are ended.

  According to the above processing, the button effect XA can be executed a plurality of times with the same contents regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XA process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 2 of previous visual notice using button production>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XB as an effect element for the existing visual notice and executes the button effect XB twice. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XB1, XB2, and XB3 and the suggestive effect F executed in the button effect XB.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XB, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XB1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S2901). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed and a character and an image that prompt the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the production mode XB1 may be another mode.

  When the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after execution of the presentation mode XB1 (S2902: YES), the presentation mode XB1 is triggered by the depression of the presentation operation button 24. Executes a different rendering mode XB2 (S2903). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, the production mode XB2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2902: NO), the production mode XB3 different from the production mode XB1 and the production mode XB2 is executed with the passage of the predetermined time (S2907). . In the example shown in FIG. 49, effect mode XB3 is an effect mode in which a fish character carries away a treasure chest. However, the production mode XB3 may be another mode.

  When the execution of the second button effect XB is started, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the effect mode XB1 as in the case of the first button effect XB (S2904 or S2908). When the effect mode XB2 is executed when the first button effect XB is executed, the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not after the effect mode XB1 is executed (S2904). In any case (S2905), the effect mode XB2 is executed (S2906). Specifically, when the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2905: YES), the presentation mode XB2 is executed in response to the depression of the presentation operation button 24 ( S2906). On the other hand, if the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2905: NO), the production mode XB2 is executed when the predetermined time has passed (S2906).

  On the other hand, when the effect mode XB3 is executed when the first button effect XB is executed, after the effect mode XB1 is executed (S2908), there are cases where the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not. In any case (S2909), the effect mode XB3 is executed (S2910). Specifically, when the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2909: YES), the presentation mode XB3 is executed in response to the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 ( S2910). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2909: NO), the production mode XB3 is executed when the predetermined time has passed (S2910).

  When the second button effect XB ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XB having the same contents has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). An effect F is executed (S2911). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

  When button effect XB is executed three times or more, the same control as that when second button effect XB is executed is repeatedly executed and suggestive effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XB. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the button effect XB a plurality of times as the effect element for the already-notified visual notice, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the first button effect XB, the player inputs Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XB, while the effect mode XB3 is executed in the first button effect XB, the operation mode of the input operation by the player Regardless, the effect mode XB3 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XB. Therefore, even when the button effect XB is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XB executed at the first time and the second time and after can be made the same. And similarly to said embodiment, the existing visual feeling (dejab) that the button effect XB of the same content was performed in multiple times can be given with respect to a player.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player can recognize that the button effect XB having the same contents has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the button effect XB of the contents is executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the presentation operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the presentation mode XB2 or the presentation mode XB2 is triggered by the depression of the presentation operation button 24. Since the effect mode XB3 is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XB, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the player does not press the presentation operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the presentation mode XB2 or the presentation is triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. Aspect XB3 can be executed. Furthermore, even if the player does not press the production operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the production mode XB2 or the production mode XB3 is executed, so that an unexpectedness can be given to the game, and the game is interesting. Improvements can be made. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XB2 or the effect mode XB3 at a predetermined timing without triggering the press of the effect operation button 24 or the elapse of a predetermined time.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and the button effect XB is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect XB is selected a plurality of times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time during which the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may depress the effect operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the presentation operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button presentations executed a plurality of times, and the button presentation with the same contents. Is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel the visual feeling for the button effect executed multiple times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual notice, the time parameter is not displayed, so that the player is less likely to feel the visual feeling. Can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and when the button effect is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display parameters.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied before the reservation information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and also generates the existing visual notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XB that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined that the condition for generating the visual notice notice is satisfied becomes the target of the big hit lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied when the hold information is a target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game time related to the hold information. The configuration may be such that XB is executed a plurality of times.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 may include a changing unit that changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when the button is pressed (that is, a mode that is depressed by pressing). Then, the change means is a case where the presentation operation button 24 is not pressed (S2905: NO), and when the presentation mode XB2 is executed (S2906), the mode of the presentation operation button 24 was pressed. It is good to change to the aspect in a case. If such a change means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that the game can be given unexpectedness, and the effect mode XB2 is displayed even though the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be compelling to be executed. The changing means can be realized, for example, by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

  In this embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB may be executed based on whether the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the pressed time and the number of times. .

  In the above example, the presentation operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving unit that receives an input operation by the player. However, the operation receiving unit is not limited thereto. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player forward / backward or left / right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. shall be adopted. Can do. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XB will be described.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in a case where the button effect XB is executed as an effect element (preliminary effect) for the existing visual notification. In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the first execution completion flag is stored in the sound side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S3001 that the initial execution flag has not been stored (S3001: NO), that is, if the button effect XB has not been executed once after the visual notice flag has been stored. In step S3002, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are caused to execute the effect mode XB1 described above. The effect mode XB1 includes content that suggests that the player presses the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3003 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3003: YES), the process proceeds to step S3004, where the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are described above. The production mode XB2 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3005, and the button press flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S3003 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3003: NO), the process proceeds to step S3006, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3006: NO), the process returns to step S3003 to determine whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3006 that the predetermined time has passed (S3006: YES), that is, if the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3007, and the symbol display as the effect execution means is displayed. The device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the above-described effect mode XB3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3008.

  In step S3008, after the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, the first button effect XB is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3001 that the initial execution flag has been stored (S3001: YES), that is, the button effect XB has already been executed at least once after the visual notice flag has been stored. Advances to step S3009 to cause the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means to execute the effect mode XB1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3010.

  In step S3010, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3010 that the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed (S3010: YES), the process proceeds to step S3012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3010 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3010: NO), the process proceeds to step S3011, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3011: NO), the process returns to step S3010 to determine whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3011: YES), that is, if the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3012.

  In step S3012, it is determined whether a button press flag is stored. If it is determined in step S3012 that the button press flag is stored (S3012: YES), the process proceeds to step S3013, and the effect mode XB2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means. After the execution, the second and subsequent button effects XB are terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3012 that the button press flag is not stored (S3012: NO), the process proceeds to step S3014, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means After XB3 is executed, the second and subsequent button effects XB are terminated.

  According to the above processing, the button effect XB can be executed a plurality of times with the same contents regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XB process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 3 of previous visual notice using button production>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XC as an effect element for the existing visual notice and executes the button effect XC twice. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XC1, XC2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XC.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XC, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XC1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S3101). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode XC1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed and characters and images that prompt the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the production mode XC1 may be another mode.

  After executing the effect mode XC1, the effect mode XC2 different from the effect mode XC1 is executed (S3103) regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3102). . Specifically, when the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3102: YES), the presentation mode XC2 is executed in response to the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 ( S3103). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode XC2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, the production mode XC2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3102: NO), the production mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has passed (S3103).

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the second button effect XC, it executes the effect mode XC1 as in the case of the first button effect XC (S3104). After executing the effect mode XC1, the effect mode XC2 is executed (S3106) regardless of whether the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3105). Specifically, when the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3105: YES), the presentation mode XC2 is executed in response to the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 ( S3106). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3105: NO), the production mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has passed (S3106).

  When the second button effect XC ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). Production F is executed (S3107). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

  When the button effect XC is executed three or more times, the same control as that when the first and second button effects XC are executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is displayed after the last button effect XC ends. Just do it.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment similarly performs the input operation by the player after executing the effect mode XC1 when the button effect XC is executed for the first time or when the button effect XC is executed for the second time or later. Regardless of the operation mode, the effect mode XC2 is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XC is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XC executed at the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. And similarly to said embodiment, the existing visual feeling (dejab) that the button effect XC of the same content was performed in multiple times can be given with respect to a player.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, the player can recognize that the button effect XC having the same contents has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the button effect XC of the contents is executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the presentation operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the presentation mode XC2 is triggered by the depression of the presentation operation button 24. Since this is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XC, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the player does not press the presentation operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the presentation mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has passed. can do. Furthermore, even if the player does not press the production operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the production mode XC2 is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness and the game can be improved. Can do. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XC2 at a predetermined timing without triggering the press of the effect operation button 24 or the elapse of a predetermined time.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment forcibly executes the effect mode XC2 even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time in the first button effect XC. For this reason, a player who knows this mechanism is expected to forcibly execute the effect mode XC2 without pressing the effect operation button 24 when the first button effect XC is executed. Will do. Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 that can also execute the button effect XA and the button effect XB in addition to the button effect XC, the effect mode XC2 is not forcibly executed in the first button effect. Even if there is, the player recognizes that the button effect currently being executed is not the button effect XC but the possibility that the button effect XA or the button effect XB is left, and suggests It is expected that there is a possibility that the production F is executed. Therefore, the player can play a game with expectation for the second and subsequent button effects.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and the button effect XC is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect XC is selected a plurality of times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time during which the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may depress the effect operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the presentation operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button presentations executed a plurality of times, and the button presentation with the same contents. Is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel the visual feeling for the button effect executed multiple times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual notice, the time parameter is not displayed, so that the player is less likely to feel the visual feeling. Can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and when the button effect is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display parameters.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied before the reservation information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and also generates the existing visual notice. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XC that is the target to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined that the condition for generating the visual notice notice is satisfied becomes the target of the jackpot lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied when the hold information is a target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game time related to the hold information. The configuration may be such that XC is executed a plurality of times.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 may include a changing unit that changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when the button is pressed (that is, a mode that is depressed by pressing). The changing means is a case where the presentation operation button 24 is not pressed (S3105: NO), and when the presentation mode XC2 is executed (S3106), the mode of the presentation operation button 24 is pressed. It is good to change to the aspect in a case. If such a change means is provided, the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that the game can be given an unexpectedness, and the effect mode XC2 is displayed even though the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be compelling to be executed. The changing means can be realized, for example, by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC may be executed based on whether the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times pressed. .

  In the above example, the presentation operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving unit that receives an input operation by the player. However, the operation receiving unit is not limited thereto. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player forward / backward or left / right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. shall be adopted. Can do. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XC will be described.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where the button effect XC is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for the existing visual notification. In this button effect XC, the same processing is executed when executed for the first time and when executed for the second time and thereafter.

  In step S3201, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means execute the effect mode XC1 described above. The effect mode XC1 includes content that suggests that the player presses the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3202.

  In step S3202, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3202 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3202: YES), the process proceeds to step S3204, and the above-described effects are applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means. After the aspect XC2 is executed, the button effect XC is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3202 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3202: NO), the process proceeds to step S3203, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3203: NO), the process returns to step S3202, and it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3203: YES), that is, if the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3204, where the effect execution means is used. After causing the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect mode XC2, the button effect XC ends.

  According to the above processing, the button effect XC can be executed a plurality of times with the same contents regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XC process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 4 of previous visual notice using button production>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as an effect element for the already-notified visual notice and executes the button effect XD twice. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an effect selection screen XD1, an effect mode XD2 and a suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XD.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XD, the pachinko machine 10 first includes content that suggests that the player presses the effect operation button 24, and selects one of a plurality of options. An effect selection screen XD1 that allows the player to select an option is displayed (S3301). The effect selection screen XD1 is a selection screen in which the selection state is switched every time the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the production selection screen XD1, a female character appears in the middle of the screen, and a plurality of turtle characters carrying a shellfish appear in front of the female character, and the production operation button 24 is pressed. Each time the turtle character moves to the left (S3302), a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen. In the present embodiment, since the design of each turtle character is the same, the aspect of the effect selection screen XD1 does not change before and after the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the effect selection screen XD1 may have a different form other than that shown in FIG. 55, or may have a different form before and after the effect operation button is pressed.

  And the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment performs the production | presentation aspect XD2 corresponding to the choice selected at the timing which predetermined time passed (S3303). In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the production mode XD2, a turtle character in front of a female character is selected at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, and a shell carried on the selected turtle character is opened. This is a production mode in which pearls having predetermined characteristics appear. In this embodiment, the pattern of each turtle character is the same, but the characteristics of an object such as a pearl appearing from the shell are different for each turtle character.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XD, the pachinko machine 10 displays the same effect selection screen XD1 as the effect selection screen XD1 displayed in the first button effect XD (S3304). Each time the production operation button 24 is pressed, the turtle character is moved to the left (S3305), and at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, the production mode XD2 corresponding to the option selected for the first time is the same. The effect mode XD2 is executed (S3306). In the example shown in FIG. 55, a turtle character in front of a female character is selected at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, and a shell carried on the selected turtle character is opened. An effect mode XD2 in which pearls having the same characteristics appear is executed.

  When the second button effect XD is completed, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3307). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

  When the button effect XD is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XD is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the last button effect XD is completed. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the button effect XD to be executed second and subsequent times when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times as an effect element for the existing visual notice, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. Then, the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first button effect XD is executed. Accordingly, even when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XD executed at the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. As in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, the player can recognize that the button effect XD having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the button effect XD of the contents is executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect selection screen XD1 is in the same mode before and after the selection state is switched, and therefore when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the effect in the same mode The same effect mode XD2 is executed from the selection screen XD1. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the visual feeling given to the player.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and the button effect XD is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect XD is performed a plurality of times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time during which the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may depress the effect operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the presentation operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button presentations executed a plurality of times, and the button presentation with the same contents. Is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel the visual feeling for the button effect executed multiple times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual notice, the time parameter is not displayed, so that the player is less likely to feel the visual feeling. Can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and when the button effect is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display parameters.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied before the reservation information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and also generates the existing visual notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XD that is the target to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined that the condition for generating the visual notice notice is satisfied becomes the target of the jackpot lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied when the hold information is a target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game time related to the hold information. The configuration may be such that XD is executed a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the pressed time and the number of times. .

  In the above example, the presentation operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving unit that receives an input operation by the player. However, the operation receiving unit is not limited thereto. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player forward / backward or left / right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. shall be adopted. Can do. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XD will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where the button effect XD is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for the existing visual notification. In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S3401 that the first execution completed flag is not stored (S3401: NO), that is, if the button effect XD has not been executed once after the existing visual notice flag is stored. In step S3402, the above-described effect selection screen XD1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. The effect selection screen XD1 includes contents suggesting that the player presses the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3403.

  In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3403 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3403: YES), the process advances to step S3404 to display the effect selection screen XD1 in a state where the selected state is switched on the symbol display device 41. In the example shown in FIG. 55, on the effect selection screen XD1, a mode in which a turtle character moves to the left and a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen is displayed. Then, it progresses to step S3405 and it is determined whether predetermined time passed.

  If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3405: NO), the process returns to step S3403 to determine whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3405: YES), the process proceeds to step S3406, and the selected effect mode XD2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means. Let it run. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3407.

  In step S3407, the type information of the effect mode XD2 executed in step S3406 is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3408, where the first execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XD is ended.

  When it is determined in step S3401 that the initial execution flag has been stored (S3401: YES), that is, after the visual notice flag has been stored, the button effect XD has already been executed at least once. In step S3409, the same effect selection screen XD1 as that of the first time is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are caused to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3410.

  In step S3410, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3410 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3410: YES), the process proceeds to step S3411 to display the effect selection screen XD1 in a state where the selected state is switched on the symbol display device 41. Then, it progresses to step S3412 and it is determined whether predetermined time passed.

  If it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3412: NO), the process returns to step S3410, and it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3412: YES), the process proceeds to step S3413, and the effect mode XD2 stored in step S3407 is used as the effect display unit 41, speaker 46, and After the various lamps 47 are executed, the second and subsequent button effects XD are terminated.

  According to the above processing, the button effect XD can be executed a plurality of times with the same contents regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XD process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 5 of previous visual notice using button production>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XE as an effect element for the existing visual notice and executes the button effect XE twice. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of an effect selection screen XE1, an effect mode XE2 and a suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XE.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when starting the execution of the first button effect XE, includes content that suggests that the player presses the effect operation button 24, and one effect among a plurality of effect modes. An effect selection screen XE1 that allows the player to select a mode is displayed (S3501). The effect selection screen XE1 is a selection screen in which the selection state of the effect mode is switched over time. In the example shown in FIG. 58, the effect selection screen XE1 is a roulette type selection screen that allows the selection cursor to move with time and to select one effect mode from four effect modes. In this embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is high enough that the player cannot select a specific effect mode. The effect selection screen XE1 may be in another form.

  Then, regardless of whether the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed or not (S3502), one presentation mode is selected from the plurality of presentation modes and is selected. The effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). Specifically, when the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3502: YES), the presentation operation button 24 is pressed down, and then from a plurality of presentation modes. The selected production mode XE2 is executed with one production mode selected (S3503). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3502: NO), a state where one production mode is selected from a plurality of production modes when the predetermined time has passed. The selected production mode XE2 is executed (S3503). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the selected effect mode XE2 is a cut-in notice effect with a turtle character as the main character. However, other production modes may be selected as the production mode, and each production mode that may be selected may be other modes.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts execution of the second button effect XE, it displays the same effect selection screen XE1 as the effect selection screen XE1 displayed for the first time (S3504). Then, regardless of whether the production operation button 24 is pressed or not (S3505), the same production mode as the production mode selected for the first time is selected. The selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506). Specifically, when the production operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3505: YES), the production selected for the first time is triggered by the depression of the production operation button 24. The selected production mode XE2 is executed with the same production mode as the mode selected. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3505: NO), the same production mode as the production mode selected for the first time is selected when the predetermined time has passed. The selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506).

  When the second button effect XE ends, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). Production F is executed (S3507). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

  When the button effect XE is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XE is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XE. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual notice, the button effect XE to be executed after the second time regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player. The same effect mode as that performed in the first button effect XE is selected and executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XE executed at the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. As in the above embodiment, the player can be given a visual feeling (dejab) that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player can recognize that the button effect XE having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the button effect XE of the contents is executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and the button effect XE is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect XE is selected a plurality of times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time during which the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may depress the effect operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the presentation operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button presentations executed a plurality of times, and the button presentation with the same contents. Is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel the visual feeling for the button effect executed multiple times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual notice, the time parameter is not displayed, so that the player is less likely to feel the visual feeling. Can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and when the button effect is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display parameters.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is high enough that the player cannot select a specific effect mode. Therefore, even though the player has aimed so that the selection cursor stops in an effect mode different from the effect mode selected at the first time, the same effect mode as the effect mode selected at the first time is forcibly selected. It is possible to reduce the player's uncomfortable feeling that the game has been performed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied before the reservation information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and also generates the existing visual notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XE that is the target to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined that the condition for generating the visual notice notice is satisfied becomes the target of the jackpot lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied when the hold information is a target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game time related to the hold information. The configuration may be such that XE is executed a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE may be executed based on whether the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the pressed time and the number of times. .

  In the above example, the presentation operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving unit that receives an input operation by the player. However, the operation receiving unit is not limited thereto. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player forward / backward or left / right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. shall be adopted. Can do. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XE will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where the button effect XE is executed as an effect element (pre-notification effect) for the existing visual notification. In step S3601, it is determined whether or not the initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S3601 that the first execution completed flag is not stored (S3601: NO), the process proceeds to step S3602, and the above-described roulette type effect selection screen XE1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the speaker. 46 and various lamps 47 are caused to execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. The effect selection screen XE1 includes contents suggesting that the player presses the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3603.

  In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3603 that the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed (S3603: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the presentation operation button 24 is pressed, and one presentation is performed. An image indicating that an aspect has been selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3606.

  If it is determined in step S3603 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3603: NO), the process proceeds to step S3604 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3604: NO), the process returns to step S3603 to determine whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3604: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, where the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, and an image indicating that one effect mode has been selected. Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3606.

  In step S3606, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are executed by the effect mode XE2 selected in step S3605. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3607.

  In step S3607, the type of effect mode XE2 executed in step S3606 is stored in the sound light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3608.

  In step S3608, the first execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XE is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3601 that the initial execution flag has been stored (S3601: YES), that is, if the button effect XE has already been executed at least once after the visual notice flag has been stored. In step S3609, the same effect selection screen XE1 as the first time is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are caused to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3610.

  In step S3610, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3610 that the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed (S3610: YES), the process proceeds to step S3612, and the timing after the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed, which is stored in step S3607. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the produced effect mode XE2 is selected, and an image indicating that the stored effect mode XE2 is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3613.

  If it is determined in step S3610 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3610: NO), the process proceeds to step S3611, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3611: NO), the process returns to step S3610, and it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3611: YES), the process proceeds to step S3612, and the effect mode XE2 stored in step S3607 is selected at the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing, and an image indicating that the stored effect mode XE2 is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3613.

  In step S3613, after the effect mode XE2 selected in step S3612 is executed by the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means, the second and subsequent button effects XE are ended.

  According to the above processing, the button effect XE can be executed a plurality of times with the same contents regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XE process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 6 of previous visual notice using button production>
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XF as an effect element for the existing visual notice and executes the button effect XF twice. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of effect modes XF1, XF2 and suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XF.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XF, the content that suggests repeated hitting of the effect operation buttons 24 to the player and the predetermined parameter are set in a certain direction as time passes. The production mode XF1 including the changing contents is executed (S3701). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the production mode XF1 includes content in which the player's spear character is attacked with black ink from the enemy's spear character and is ready to withstand the black attack. This is a production mode in which the parameter indicating the physical strength of the character changes in a decreasing direction due to the ink attack. Further, in the effect mode XF1, as an example of a message that suggests repeated hitting of the effect operation buttons 24 to the player, a character such as “Please endure it repeatedly! However, the production mode XF1 may be another mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the production mode XF1 is executed, the parameter decreases with the passage of time (S3702). At this time, if the effect operation button 24 is continuously hit by the player, the pachinko machine 10 executes control to reduce the parameter reduction speed. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 performs control so that the decrease speed of the parameter decreases as the number of presses of the effect operation buttons 24 per unit time increases. In this way, the player hits the effect operation button 24 repeatedly so as to increase the number of times the effect operation button 24 is pressed per unit time in an attempt to decrease the parameter decrease rate. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the player attempts to reduce the parameter decrease speed by repeatedly striking the effect operation button 24 so that the character of the samurai can withstand the attack of the samurai. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the effect mode XF2 after the parameters satisfy a predetermined parameter condition (S3704). Specifically, after the parameter decreases to 0, the effect mode XF2 is executed (S3704). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the production mode XF2 is a production mode that includes content that the player-side spear character loses without being able to endure the attack of the enemy-side spear character. However, the production mode XF2 may be another mode.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XF, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same control as the first button effect XF. Specifically, the effect mode XF1 is executed (S3705), the parameter is decreased with time (S3706), and after the parameter becomes 0 (S3707), the effect mode XF2 is executed (S3708). That is, the production mode XF1 and the production mode XF2 are executed regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the production operation button 24.

  When the second button effect XF ends, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XF having the same contents has been executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example). Production F is executed (S3709). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above.

  When the button effect XF is executed three times or more, the same control as when the second button effect XF is executed is repeatedly executed and the suggestion effect F is executed after the last button effect XF is finished. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.). May be. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment similarly performs the input operation by the player after executing the effect mode XF1 when the button effect XF is executed for the first time or when the button effect XF is executed for the second time or later. Regardless of the operation mode, the parameter is decreased to 0 and the production mode XF2 is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XF is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XF executed at the first time and after the second time can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player can recognize that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the button effect XF of the contents is executed a plurality of times. In particular, when an effect mode that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, an effect mode in which the character on the player's side is defeated) is executed as the effect mode XF2, a suggestion effect is executed from a depressed feeling, and the player The expectation of can be raised at a stretch. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied before the reservation information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and also generates the existing visual notice. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XF that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined that the condition for generating the visual notice notice is satisfied becomes the target of the big hit lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied when the hold information is a target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game time related to the hold information. The configuration may be such that XF is executed a plurality of times.

  The pachinko machine 10 stores the process of changing the parameter when executing the first button effect XF, and the process of changing the stored parameter when executing the second and subsequent button effect XF. May be reproduced. In this way, the process of changing the parameter is the same in each of the button effects XF executed a plurality of times, so that it is possible to give the player a stronger visual sensation.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 may include a changing unit that changes the mode of the effect operation button 24 to a mode when the press is performed (that is, a mode that is depressed by the press). And when the pachinko machine 10 performs the first button effect XF, the pachinko machine 10 memorizes the process of changing the mode of the effect operation button 24 when the effect operation button 24 is repeatedly hit by the player and the second and subsequent times. When the button effect XF is executed, the change process of the stored aspect of the effect operation button 24 may be reproduced by the changing means. In this way, since the aspect of the effect operation button 24 changes, an unexpectedness can be given to the game. Furthermore, in the second and subsequent button effects XF, the process of changing the aspect of the effect operation buttons 24 in the first button effect XF is reproduced, so that a stronger visual feeling can be given to the player.

  In the above example, the example in which the parameter is changed in the direction of decreasing with the passage of time has been described. However, the parameter may be changed in the direction of increasing with the passage of time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may perform control so that the increase speed of the parameter increases as the number of presses of the presentation operation buttons 24 per unit time increases. Examples of the parameter that increases with the passage of time include an attack power parameter of a player's character, a power parameter, and the like. Then, after the parameter increases and reaches a predetermined value such as the maximum value, a positive effect mode such as a victory effect may be executed. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 increases the button effect XF because the parameter increases to a predetermined maximum value regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player, as in the above example. Can be executed multiple times with the same contents. In addition, in order to increase the parameter increase speed, the player hits the effect operation buttons 24 repeatedly so that the number of presses of the effect operation buttons 24 per unit time increases. Therefore, similarly to the above example, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the above example, the parameter is an aspect indicated by a rod shape, but is not limited thereto, and may be an aspect indicated by another shape such as a circle, and is indicated only by a numerical value. It may be an embodiment.

  In the above example, the presentation operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving unit that receives an input operation by the player. However, the operation receiving unit is not limited thereto. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player forward / backward or left / right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. shall be adopted. Can do. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XF will be described.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where the button effect XF is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for the existing visual notification. In this button effect XF, the same processing is executed when executed for the first time and when executed for the second time and thereafter.

  In step S3801, the above-described effect mode XF1 is executed by the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means. The effect mode XF1 includes content that suggests repeated hitting of the effect operation button 24 to the player and content that changes in a direction in which the physical strength parameter decreases with time. After executing step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802.

  In step S3802, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 is continuously hit. Specifically, for example, the number of presses of the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time is counted, and when the number of presses is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been repeatedly hit. If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect operation button 24 has been continuously hit (S3802: YES), the process proceeds to step S3803 and the physical strength parameter is decreased at a predetermined speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3805.

  If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect operation button 24 has not been continuously hit (S3802: NO), the process proceeds to step S3804, and the physical strength parameter is decreased at a speed higher than the predetermined speed in step S3803. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3805.

  In step S3805, it is determined whether the physical strength parameter has become zero. If it is determined in step S3805 that the physical strength parameter is not 0 (S3805: NO), the process returns to step S3802, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 is continuously hit. In other words, the presence / absence of the directing operation button 24 is monitored until the physical strength parameter becomes 0, the physical strength parameter is decreased at a slow speed during the period in which the directing operation button 24 is repeatedly hit, and the directing operation button 24 is not repeatedly hit. The period decreases the health parameter at a fast rate.

  If it is determined in step S3805 that the physical strength parameter has become 0 (S3805: YES), the process proceeds to step S3806, and the above-described effect mode XF2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means. Let it run. Thereafter, the notice effect for the previous notice of the first or second notice is ended.

  In the above example, the speed at which the physical strength value is decreased has been described as two steps depending on whether or not the hitting is repeated, but may be three steps or more depending on the number of times the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time. Good.

  According to the above processing, the button effect XF can be executed a plurality of times with the same contents regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XF process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 7 of previous visual notice using button production>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XG as an effect element for the already-notified visual notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect modes XG1, XG2 and the suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XG.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XG, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XG1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S3901). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode XG1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed and characters and images that prompt the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the production mode XA1 may be another mode.

  If the presentation operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after execution of the presentation mode XG1 (S3902: YES), the presentation mode XG1 is triggered by the depression of the presentation operation button 24. Executes a different rendering mode XG2 (S3903). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode XG2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, the production mode XG2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3902: NO), the production mode XG2 is not executed while the production mode XG1 is being executed.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XG, the effect mode XG1 is executed as in the case of the first button effect XG (S3904 or S3908). Then, after the effect mode XG1 is executed, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3905: YES or S3909: YES), the event that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is triggered. As described above, the effect mode XG2 is executed (S3906 or S3910). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3905: NO or S3909: NO), the production mode XG2 is not executed while the production mode XG1 is being executed.

  And the pachinko machine 10 produces the production mode when the production mode XG2 is executed in all of the button productions XG executed a plurality of times (in the above example, twice) or in all the button productions XG executed a plurality of times. If XG2 has not been executed even once, a suggestion effect F that suggests to the player that the button effect XG has been executed a plurality of times with the same content is executed (S3907 or S3911). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above. On the other hand, if the button effect XG executed multiple times is not executed with the same content even once, specifically, the second operation is performed in spite of the effect mode XG2 being executed in the first button effect XG. The effect mode XG2 is executed in the second button effect XG when the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the button effect XG and the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG. If it is, the suggestion effect F is not executed, and the normal reach effect is executed.

  When the button effect XG is executed three times or more, the same control as that when the second button effect XG is executed is repeatedly executed and the suggestion effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XG. What is necessary is just to determine.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times, the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same contents, and the same. It is possible to give the player a pre-existing feeling (dejab) that the button effect XG having the contents is executed a plurality of times. Furthermore, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same contents, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player recognizes that the button effect XG having the same contents is executed a plurality of times. And the player can be convinced that there is a special meaning that the button effect XG having the same contents is executed a plurality of times.

  Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect F after the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects the suggestion effect F to be executed, and whenever the button effect XG is executed, By performing the same input operation and operating the effect operation button 24 so that the button effect XG is executed with the same content, the generation of the suggestive effect F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention degree to the button effects XG that are sequentially executed can be suitably increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the presentation operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the presentation mode XG2 is triggered by the depression of the presentation operation button 24. Since this is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XG, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XG2 at a predetermined timing without triggering the pressing of the effect operation button 24.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and the button effect XG is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect XG is performed a plurality of times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time during which the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may depress the effect operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the presentation operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button presentations executed a plurality of times, and the button presentation with the same contents. Is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel the visual feeling for the button effect executed multiple times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual notice, the time parameter is not displayed, so that the player is less likely to feel the visual feeling. Can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and when the button effect is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display parameters.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied before the reservation information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and also generates the existing visual notice. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XG that is the target to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined that the condition for generating the visual notice notice is satisfied becomes the target of the jackpot lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied when the hold information is a target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game time related to the hold information. The configuration may be such that XG is executed a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG may be executed based on whether the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the pressed time and the number of times. .

  In the above example, the presentation operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving unit that receives an input operation by the player. However, the operation receiving unit is not limited thereto. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player forward / backward or left / right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. shall be adopted. Can do. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XG will be described.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where the button effect XG is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for the existing visual notification. In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that the first execution completed flag is not stored (S4001: NO), that is, if the button effect XG has not been executed once after the existing visual notice flag is stored. In step S4002, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are caused to execute the effect mode XG1 described above. The effect mode XG1 includes content that suggests that the player presses the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4003.

  In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4003 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4003: YES), the process proceeds to step S4004, where the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 serving as effect execution means are described above. The production mode XG2 is executed. After executing step S4004, the process proceeds to step S4005, and the button pressing flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. The button press flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XG is executed. After executing Step S4005, the process proceeds to Step S4007.

  If it is determined in step S4003 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4003: NO), the process proceeds to step S4006, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4006: NO), the process returns to step S4003 to determine whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4006: YES), that is, if the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, step S4004 and step S4005 are not executed, The process proceeds to S4007.

  In step S4007, the initial execution completion flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4008, the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XG is ended.

  The suggestion effect execution flag indicates that when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the existing visual notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all the button effects XG. Alternatively, this is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XG2 has never been executed in all the button effects XG of the plurality of times.

  As will be described in the processing of each step below, the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in the second and subsequent times when the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG after the existing visual notice flag is stored. When the effect mode XG2 is not executed even once in the button effect XG, it is deleted. In addition, the suggestion effect execution flag is an effect mode even once in the second and subsequent button effects XG when the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG after the existing visual notice flag is stored. It is erased when XG2 is executed. That is, after the previous visual notice flag is stored, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times, when the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the button effect XG, When the effect mode XG2 has never been executed in all of the button effects XG, the suggestion effect execution flag remains stored without being erased. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect execution flag is stored when setting the content of the notice effect of the game times related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual notice notification. If it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect F described above is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the suggestion effect F is not executed, and a normal reach effect or the like is executed. Hereinafter, the description returns to the processing of each step in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that the initial execution flag has been stored (S4001: YES), that is, the button effect XG has already been executed at least once after the visual notice flag has been stored. Advances to step S4009 to cause the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 as the effect executing means to execute the effect mode XG1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4010.

  In step S4010, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4010: YES), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the effect mode XG2 is applied to the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means. Is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4012, and it is determined whether or not the button press flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S4012 that the button press flag is stored (S4012: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XG are terminated without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4012 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4012: NO), the process proceeds to step S4015.

  In step S4015, when the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is deleted, and the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended. If the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended as they are.

  If it is determined in step S4010 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4010: NO), the process proceeds to step S4013, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4013: NO), the process returns to step S4010, and it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4013: YES), that is, if the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4014.

  In step S4014, it is determined whether or not a button press flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S4014 that the button press flag is stored (S4014: YES), the process proceeds to step S4015 described above, and the suggestion effect execution flag is deleted when the suggestion effect execution flag is stored. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4014 that the button press flag is not stored (S4014: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XG are terminated without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag.

  According to the above processing, the suggestion effect F can be executed only when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XG process may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 8 of previous visual notice using button production>
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XH as an effect element for the existing visual notice and executes the button effect XH twice. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of effect modes XH1, XH2, XH3 and suggestion effect F executed in the button effect XH.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts the execution of the first button effect XH, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect mode XH1 including the content suggesting the player to press the effect operation button 24 (S4101). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH1 is an effect mode in which an image of a treasure box is displayed and characters and images that prompt the user to press the effect operation button 24 are displayed. However, the production mode XH1 may be another mode.

  When the production operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time after the production mode XH1 is executed (S4102: YES), the production mode XH1 is triggered by the depression of the production operation button 24. Executes a different rendering mode XH2 (S4103). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from a treasure chest. However, the production mode XH2 may be another mode. On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S4102: NO), the production mode XH3 which is different from the production mode XH1 and the production mode XH2 is executed with the passage of the predetermined time (S4109). . In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH3 is an effect mode in which the fish character carries away the treasure chest. However, the production mode XH3 may be another mode.

  When the execution of the second button effect XH is started, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the effect mode XH1 as in the case of the first button effect XH (S4104 or S4110). Then, after the effect mode XH1 is executed, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S4105: YES or S4111: YES), the event that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is triggered. As described above, the effect mode XH2 is executed (S4106 or S4112). On the other hand, when the production operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S4105: NO or S4111: NO), the production mode XH3 is executed with the passage of the predetermined time (S4107).

  And the pachinko machine 10 produces the production mode when the production mode XH2 is executed in all of the button productions XH executed a plurality of times (twice in the above example), or in all the button productions XH executed a plurality of times. When XH3 is executed, a suggestion effect F that suggests to the player that the button effect XH has been executed a plurality of times with the same content is executed (S4108 or S4114). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the suggestion effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Maybe dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effects described above. On the other hand, when the button effect XH executed a plurality of times is not executed with the same content even once, specifically, the second operation is performed in spite of the effect mode XH2 being executed in the first button effect XH. When the effect mode XH3 is executed in the button effect XH, and when the effect mode XH2 is executed in the second button effect XH even though the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH Does not execute the suggestion effect F, but performs a normal reach effect or the like.

  When button effect XH is executed three or more times, the same control as when button effect XH is executed for the second time is repeatedly executed, and suggestive effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XH. What is necessary is just to determine.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects that are executed a plurality of times, the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same contents, and the same It is possible to give the player a pre-sensation (dejab) that the button effect XH having the contents is executed a plurality of times. Furthermore, since the suggestion effect F is executed when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player is made to recognize that the button effect XH having the same content is executed a plurality of times. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XH having the same contents is executed a plurality of times and that it has a special meaning.

  Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect F after the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the player expects the suggestion effect F to be executed, and whenever the button effect XH is executed, By performing the same input operation and operating the effect operation button 24 so that the button effect XH is executed with the same content, the generation of the suggestive effect F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the button effect XH that is sequentially executed can be suitably increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the presentation operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the presentation mode XH2 is triggered by the depression of the presentation operation button 24. Since this is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XH, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XH2 at a predetermined timing without triggering the pressing of the effect operation button 24.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a case in which the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and the button effect XH is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect XH is performed a plurality of times. In the case of execution, a time parameter indicating whether or not it is within a time during which the pressing of the presentation operation button 24 can be accepted is not displayed. The reason for this will be described. The player may depress the effect operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is displayed, the player recognizes that the player has pressed the presentation operation button 24 at different timings for each of the button presentations executed a plurality of times, and the button presentation with the same contents. Is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel the visual feeling for the button effect executed multiple times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual notice, the time parameter is not displayed, so that the player is less likely to feel the visual feeling. Can be suppressed. However, the pachinko machine 10 is a case where the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied, and when the button effect is selected as the visual element for the visual notice and the button effect is executed a plurality of times, It may be configured to display parameters.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the conditions for generating the existing visual notice are satisfied before the reservation information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and also generates the existing visual notice. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XH that is a target to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined that the condition for generating the visual notice notice is satisfied becomes the target of the big hit lottery. Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition for generating the visual notice is satisfied when the hold information is a target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game time related to the hold information. The configuration may be such that XH is executed a plurality of times.

  In the present embodiment, the control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH is executed based on whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH may be executed based on whether the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition such as the time and the number of times of pressing. .

  In the above example, the presentation operation button 24 has been described as an example of the operation receiving unit that receives an input operation by the player. However, the operation receiving unit is not limited thereto. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or lever operated by the player forward / backward or left / right, a button for detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor for detecting a hand approaching the liquid crystal screen, etc. shall be adopted. Can do. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XH will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing in the case where the button effect XH is executed as an effect element (notice effect) for the existing visual notification. In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the first execution completed flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S4201 that the initial execution flag has not been stored (S4201: NO), that is, if the button effect XH has not been executed once after the visual notice flag has been stored. In step S4202, the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are caused to execute the effect mode XH1 described above. The effect mode XH1 includes content that suggests that the player presses the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4203.

  In step S4203, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4203 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4203: YES), the process proceeds to step S4204, and the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means are described above. The production mode XH2 is executed. After executing step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4205, and the button press flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. The button press flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XH is executed. After executing step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4207.

  If it is determined in step S4203 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4203: NO), the process proceeds to step S4206 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4206: NO), the process returns to step S4203 to determine whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4206: YES), that is, if the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4207, and the symbol display as the effect execution means is performed. The device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the above-described effect mode XH3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4208.

  In step S4208, the initial execution completion flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4209, the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XH is ended.

  The suggestion effect execution flag indicates that when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the existing visual notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the button effects XH. Alternatively, this is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XH2 has never been executed in all of the plurality of button effects XH.

  As will be described in the process of each step below, the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in the second and subsequent times when the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH after the existing visual notice flag is stored. When the effect mode XH3 is executed even once in the button effect XH, it is deleted. The suggestion effect execution flag is the effect mode XH2 even in the second and subsequent button effects XH when the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH after the existing visual notice flag is stored. Is erased when executed. In other words, after the existing visual notice flag is stored, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times, the same effect aspect XH2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effects XH, or the plurality When the same effect mode XH3 is executed in all of the button effects XH, the suggestion effect execution flag remains stored without being erased. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the suggestion effect execution flag is stored when setting the content of the notice effect of the game times related to the hold information determined to satisfy the condition for generating the visual notice notification. If it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect F described above is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the suggestion effect F is not executed, and a normal reach effect or the like is executed. Hereinafter, the description returns to the processing of each step in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4201 that the initial execution flag has been stored (S4201: YES), that is, if the button effect XH has already been executed at least once after the visual notice flag has been stored. Advances to step S4210 to cause the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 as the effect execution means to execute the effect mode XH1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4211.

  In step S4211, it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4211 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4211: YES), the process proceeds to step S4212, and the effect mode XH2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 as effect execution means. Is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4213, and it is determined whether or not the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound side RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S4213 that the button press flag is stored (S4213: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XH are terminated without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4213 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4213: NO), the process proceeds to step S4217.

  In step S4217, if the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is deleted, and the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended. If the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the second and subsequent button effects XH are terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4211 that the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4211: NO), the process proceeds to step S4214, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4214: NO), the process returns to step S4211, and it is determined whether or not the presentation operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, whether or not the presentation operation button 24 is pressed is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4214: YES), that is, if the presentation operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4215, and the symbol display as the effect execution means is performed. The device 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are caused to execute the effect mode XH3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4216.

  In step S4216, it is determined whether or not a button press flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S4216 that the button pressing flag is stored (S4216: YES), the process proceeds to step S4217 described above, and the suggested effect execution flag is deleted when the suggested effect execution flag is stored. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4216 that the button press flag is not stored (S4216: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XH are terminated without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag.

  According to the above processing, the suggestion effect F can be executed only when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The process described above is an example, and the button effect XH process may be realized by another algorithm.

  According to this embodiment described above, various expectations can be given to the player. In particular, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to select at least two or more of the button effects XA, XB, XC, XG, and XH as effect elements for a visual notice, While paying attention to the effect mode executed in the effect, various predictions are made as to what kind of button effect is executed, and the occurrence of the suggestive effect is expected. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. The main difference between the present embodiment and the first to seventh embodiments is that a second start port unit 200 including a second start port is provided in the right region of the game area GA, and 2 The high frequency support mode of the kind is set. In the following description, the configuration of the second starting port unit 200 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control related to the second starting port unit 200 will be mainly described. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure and process same as the said 1st-7th embodiment.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the second start port unit 200 including the second start port is provided in the right region of the game area GA. In the present embodiment, all the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a firing strength of a predetermined level or more are configured to enter the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the second start port unit 200. The second starter unit 200 includes an opening 202 into which a game ball can enter, a path R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 202, a path R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 202, An alternating distribution mechanism 204 that distributes game balls that have entered the opening 202 alternately between the left path R1 and the right path R2 is provided. A through gate 206 through which a game ball can pass is provided downstream of the path R1, and an opening / closing ball entrance device 208 is provided downstream of the through gate 206 and the path R2.

  The alternating distribution mechanism 204 is configured to distribute the game balls that have entered the opening 202 to the path R1, and distribute the game balls that have arrived after the game balls to be distributed to the path R1 to the path R2. Specifically, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 includes a central piece 204a formed at the center, a left piece 204b formed on the left side of the central piece 204a, and a right side formed on the right side of the central piece 204a. One piece 204c and a rotating shaft 204d provided between the left piece 204b and the right piece 204c are provided. A region sandwiched between the central piece 204a and the left piece 204b functions as a left holding portion 204e that temporarily holds a game ball. The area sandwiched between the central piece 204a and the right piece 204c functions as a right holding part 204f that temporarily holds a game ball. The behavior of the alternating distribution mechanism 204 when the game ball reaches the alternating distribution mechanism 204 will be described later.

  The opening and closing ball entry device 208 includes an opening and closing door 208b as an electric accessory that opens and closes forward and backward with a rotating shaft at the bottom as a base point, and a second start opening 208a through which a game ball can enter is provided inside the opening and closing door 208b. I have. In addition, a guide path 208c inclined toward the second starting port 208a is provided inside the opening / closing door 208b, and a game ball entering the inside of the opening / closing door 208b is second along the guide path 208c. It is guided to the start port 208a. The 2nd starting opening 208a has the same role as the 2nd starting opening 34 in the above-mentioned embodiment. When the open / close door 208b is in a closed state, it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 208a. On the other hand, when the open / close door 208b is in an open state, a game ball can enter the second start port 208a. In other words, the open / close door 208b has a function of causing the state of the second start opening 208a to transition between a ball entry disabled state and a ball entry enabled state. In normal times, the open / close door 208b is in a closed state, and the second starting port 208a is in a state where it is impossible to enter a ball.

  The through gate 206 includes a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball passes through the through gate 206, the main controller 60 uses the internal lottery (electrical function) as to whether or not to change the open / close door 208 b described above to the open state when the game ball passes through the through gate 206. Execute a product open lottery). As a result of the lottery for opening the electrical equipment, if the winning of opening / closing the door 208b is selected, the main controller 60 displays the result of the lottery for opening the electrical equipment on the normal unit 38 and closes the door 208b. Transition from state to open state.

  The route R1 is configured such that the distributed game ball can pass through the through gate 206, and the distributed game ball has the open / close door 208b of the open / close entrance device 208 open. In such a case, the ball can enter the second starting port 208a. In the present embodiment, the route R1x branched from the route R1 is provided, but the game balls distributed to the route R1 are configured to pass through the through gate 206 without fail. However, as another embodiment, a configuration in which the game balls distributed to the route R1 may pass through the route R1x without passing through the through gate 206 may be adopted.

  The route R2 is configured such that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the through gate 206, and the distributed game ball is opened when the open / close door 208b of the open / close entrance device 208 is open. In some cases, the ball can enter the second starting port 208a.

  In this embodiment, after the game ball has passed through the through gate 206, the result of the electric player opening lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 206 is displayed by the normal unit 38. The time until the game ball is through-gate (ie, the variable time from when the light emission display unit of the normal unit 38 starts the variable display until the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric player opening lottery) It is set to a time shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through 206 until the game ball reaches the opening and closing device 208. Specifically, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208 is about 0.2 seconds. Is set to 0.05 seconds.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal unit 38 until the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing device 208 starts a transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in this embodiment, when winning is performed in the electric utility opening lottery, the opening / closing door 208b is closed immediately after the fluctuation of the normal drawing unit 38 is finished and the result of the electric bonus opening lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state is started.

  Strictly speaking, however, there is a time required for the control from when the result of the electric appliance opening lottery is displayed by the ordinary unit 38 until the opening / closing door 208b starts transition from the closed state to the open state. . In the present embodiment, the time required for the control until the opening / closing door 208b of the open / close ball entry device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state after the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the general-purpose unit 38 is displayed. Is about 0.004 seconds. For the reason of about 0.004 seconds, as described above, the main control device 60 performs the power combination support processing (FIG. 12: S407, FIG. 76 described later) in the normal processing (FIG. 12) for 0.004 seconds. When it is repeatedly executed in a cycle, and the electrification winning lottery is won, and the winning result is displayed on the normal unit 38 (FIG. 76: S4520), in the next cycle to be executed in a cycle of 0.004 seconds This is because the opening / closing door 208b opening process (FIG. 77: S4698) is executed in the electric role opening / closing process (FIG. 76: S4522, FIG. 77 described later) of the electric role support process (FIG. 76). That is, in this embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38 and the waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b, the opening / closing operation is performed after the game ball passes through the through gate 206 even when the time required for control is taken into consideration. The time required for the opening / closing door 208b of the ball device 208 to start the transition from the closed state to the open state is the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball reaches the open / close ball entering device 208. The time is shorter than the time.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 and is won in the electric player opening lottery, the main controller 60 opens and closes the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric player open lottery. Prior to the timing to reach the ball device 208, the open / close door 208b is changed from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric game object opening lottery enters the second start opening 208a provided inside the opening / closing door 208b when the electric game object opening lottery is won. Will do.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high-frequency support mode and a second high-frequency support mode as types of the high-frequency support mode for controlling the door 208b. In the first high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the open / close door 208b is opened once and the opening time is 0 when winning in the electric agent opening lottery. .5 seconds is set. In the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the opening / closing door 208b is opened once and the opening time is 1 when winning in the electric agent opening lottery. It is set to 1 second. That is, the difference between the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode is the length of time that the open / close door 208b maintains the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state. 81, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second start port unit 200 when the first high-frequency support mode is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 71, the game ball is 0.6 at a constant firing strength that can reach the second starter unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  As shown in the state A1, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 from the opening 202, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is reached. In the example shown in the state A1, since the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the right side, the game ball that has reached the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held in the left holding unit 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding unit 204e, and enters the state A2. .

  As shown in state A2, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding unit 204e falls from the left holding unit 204e and is distributed to the left path R1. . Thereafter, the game balls GB1 distributed to the route R1 pass through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes the electric accessory release lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electrification opening lottery is set to 100% in the first high-frequency support mode. The opening / closing door 208b is opened once and the opening time is set to 0.5 seconds. In addition, the fluctuation time of the universal map unit 38 for displaying the lottery result of the electric character opening lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. As described above, in this embodiment, there is no waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b, and the winning / opening device 208 is displayed after the winning result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed on the normal unit 38. The time required for the control until the opening / closing door 208b starts transition to the open state is about 0.004 seconds. Therefore, the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entry device 208 transitions to an open state about 0.06 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.5 seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208 is about 0.2 seconds. At the timing when the passed game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, the open / close door 208b is in an open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second start port 208a. After that, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202 and enters the state A3.

  As shown in state A3, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the left side. The game ball GB2 that has reached the distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held in the right holding unit 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding unit 204f, and enters the state A4.

  As shown in state A4, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding part 204f falls from the right holding part 204f and is distributed to the right path R2. . Thereafter, the game balls GB2 distributed to the route R2 reach the opening / closing entrance device 208. Here, in this embodiment, since the interval between the game balls fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, the game ball GB2 opens and closes after the game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing device 208. The interval until reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 208b has already shifted to the closed state at the timing when the gaming ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208. It is not possible to enter the second starting port 208a provided inside the device 208. Thereafter, the state A1 is entered again, and the state A1 to the state A4 are repeated.

  That is, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game ball is continuously emitted at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined launch intensity at which the game ball launching mechanism 81 can reach the second starter unit 200. When the game ball GB1 that has been distributed to the route R1 and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening and closing device 208, the open / close door 208b is shifted to the open state, and is distributed to the route R2. At the timing when the played game ball GB2 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, the opening and closing door 208b transitions to the closed state.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second start port unit 200 when the second high-frequency support mode is being executed. The state A1 to state A3 in FIG. 72 is the same as the state A1 to state A3 in FIG. 71 described above. However, in the second high-frequency support mode, since the opening time of the door 208b is set to 1.1 seconds, as shown in the state A4 of FIG. 72, the next game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1. At the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entry device 208 is maintained in an open state, and the game ball GB2 is provided at a second start port provided inside the opening and closing door 208b. You will enter 208a.

  That is, in the second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the game ball is continuously emitted at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined launch intensity at which the game ball launch mechanism 81 can reach the second starter unit 200. When the game ball GB1 distributed to the first path and passing through the through gate 206 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state and the second The opening / closing door 208b is maintained in the open state even at the timing when the game balls GB2 distributed to the path of No. 1 reach the opening / closing entrance device 208.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a sorting table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. In FIG. 73, for reference, the types and contents of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode are also described. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode are set as types of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball when a game ball enters the second start opening 208a is set to one.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the jackpot lottery based on the entrance of the game ball to the first start port 33 is won and the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 9, A transition to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is made, and a transition to the first high-frequency support mode is made after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 25 to 29, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 208a is won and the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, A transition to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is made, and a transition to the first high-frequency support mode is made after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Here, the game balls were fired in a situation where they are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starter unit 200 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls is defined as the start rate, and the start rate when the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high-frequency support mode is executed. It is defined as the sphericity Mi. In the following, a description will be given of the pitch rate M1 when the first high-frequency support mode is being executed and the pitch rate M2 when the second high-frequency support mode is being executed.

In the first high-frequency support mode, a game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starter unit 200 by the game ball launch mechanism 81 Then, as described above, one of the two launched game balls enters the second start opening 208a of the opening and closing entrance device 208, and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. It will be. Therefore, the ball exit rate M1 when the first high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M1 = 1/2 = 0.50

  Here, the ball exit rate of less than 1 means that the game ball can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined launch strength and continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds. This means that the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Therefore, the first high-frequency support mode means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced. Specifically, in the first high-frequency support mode, two game balls are fired in 1.2 seconds and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. , And decrease at a rate of 1 per 1.2 seconds.

In the second high-frequency support mode, a game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launch mechanism 81 Then, as described above, two game balls out of the two launched game balls enter the second start opening 208a of the opening / closing entrance device 208, and the two game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the turnout rate M2 when the second high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M2 = 2/2 = 1.00

  Here, the ball exit rate of 1 means that the game ball can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81 and is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. This means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease in the fired situation. Therefore, in the second high-frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high frequency support mode, two game balls are fired in 1.2 seconds and two game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will not increase or decrease.

  Further, PAi is defined as a ratio of executing the i-th high-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33. Then, the ratio PA1 at which the first high-frequency support mode is executed and the ratio PA2 at which the second high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PA1 = number of jackpot type counter C2 (0 to 19) / hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 and shift to the first high frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 20/30
PA2 = number of jackpot type counter C2 (20 to 29) / hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 and shift to the second high frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 10/30

  In addition, when the high-frequency support is executed by winning the big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, the total ball-out rate is defined as the first total ball-out rate T1. The first overall appearance rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (1).

  In the above formula (1), n is the number of types of high-frequency support mode, and n = 2 in this embodiment. Accordingly, the first total ball exit rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2
= 0.50 × (20/30) + 1.00 × (10/30) = 0.67

  In other words, the first total pitching rate T1 is the sum of the pitching rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 multiplied by the execution rate, It means the expected value of sphere.

Further, PBi is defined as the ratio of executing the i-th high-frequency support mode in the case where the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second start port 208a. To do. Then, the ratio PB1 at which the first high-frequency support mode is executed and the ratio PB2 at which the second high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.
PB1 = the number of jackpot type counter C2 (0 to 11) / hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 208a and shift to the first high-frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 12/30
PB2 = number of jackpot type counter C2 (12 to 29) / hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 208a and shift to the second high frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 18/30

  Further, when the high-frequency support is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second start port 208a, the total ball-out rate is defined as the second total ball-out rate T2. The second total turnout rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (2).

  In the above formula (2), n is the number of types of high-frequency support mode, and n = 2 in this embodiment. Accordingly, the second total ball exit rate T2 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2
= 0.50 × (12/30) + 1.00 × (18/30) = 0.80

  That is, the second total pitch rate T2 is the sum of the rate of launches of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 208a multiplied by the execution rate. It means the expected value of sphere.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total pitch rate T1 and the value of the second total pitch rate T2 are less than 1. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

  Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processes different from those in the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same processes will be omitted.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a winning opening process for the start port executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. Below, a difference with the process (FIG. 10) which the main control apparatus 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the said 1st Embodiment performs is demonstrated.

  In step S4306, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. The processing in the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 10) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, which is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Below, the difference with the process (FIG. 19) which the main control apparatus 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the said 1st Embodiment performs is demonstrated.

  In step S4404, the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment stores the second high-frequency support flag. Thus, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is ended, the support mode shifts to the gaming state in which the second high-frequency support mode is set. The second high frequency support flag is used to determine whether or not the second high frequency support mode is being executed.

  Further, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment stores the first high-frequency support flag in step S4407. Thereby, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the support mode shifts to the gaming state in which the first high-frequency support mode is set. The processing in the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 19) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. The first high frequency support flag is used to determine whether or not the first high frequency support mode is being executed.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the electrical combination support process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. Below, a difference with the process (FIG. 20) which the main control apparatus 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the said 1st Embodiment performs is demonstrated.

  In step S4509, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs an electric accessory release lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric-powered object opening lottery during the high-frequency support mode is set to 100%. Specifically, since the value that can be taken by the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 249, the electric accessory release lottery is won. . At the same time as the electrification opening lottery, “25” (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2.

  In step S4511, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment stores the support winning flag and sets “1” in the second round counter area RC2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. To do. This means that the number of times of opening / closing the door 208b is one when the electrification opening lottery is won during the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment. The processing in the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 20) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the electrical combination opening / closing process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 21) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that a different opening time is set for each of the two types of high frequency support modes. This will be specifically described below.

  In step S4601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing door 208b as the electric accessory is being opened. Whether or not the open / close door 208b is open is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the open / close door 208b is opened (S4601: YES), the process proceeds to step S4602.

  In step S4602, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration time of the open / close door 208b. If it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S4602: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. That is, when the opening continuation time of the opening / closing door 208b has not ended, the main utility opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S4602: YES), the process proceeds to step S4603, and a closing process for controlling the open / close door 208b to a closed state is performed. 2. Set "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration time of the opening / closing door 208b is “0”, the opening / closing door 208b is closed and this time the second timer counter area T2 is now opened / closed by the opening / closing door 208b. This is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the second timer counter, and “25” is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S4603, the process proceeds to step S4604.

  In step S4604, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S4605, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S4605: NO), the main role opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S4605: YES), the process proceeds to step S4606, and the supporting flag is deleted. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that the open / close door 208b is not open (S4601: NO), the process advances to step S4607 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the open / close door 208b. If it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S4607: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S4607: YES), the process proceeds to step S4608, and an opening process for controlling the open / close door 208b to the open state is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4609.

  In step S4609, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed. If it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is not being performed (S4609: NO), the process proceeds to step S4610 to determine whether or not the first high-frequency support mode is being performed. Determine whether.

  If it is determined in step S4610 that the first high-frequency support mode is in progress (S4610: YES), the process proceeds to step S4611, and “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4610 that the first high-frequency support mode is not in effect (S4610: NO), the process proceeds to step S4612, and it is determined whether the second high-frequency support mode is in effect.

  If it is determined in step S4612 that the second high-frequency support mode is in effect (S4612: YES), the flow advances to step S4613 to set “550” (that is, 1.1 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4609 that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed (S4609: YES), or when it is determined in step S4612 that the second high-frequency support mode is not being performed (S4612: NO), the process proceeds to step S4614. Then, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 can pass through the through gate 206, and the second when the open / close door 208b is open. It is possible to enter the starting port 208a. On the other hand, the game ball GB2 that has arrived after the game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R2, and therefore cannot pass through the through gate 206 and the second start port 208a when the open / close door 208b is open. It becomes possible to enter the ball. That is, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, only the game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 206, and each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second start opening 208a. Whether or not depends on whether or not the opening / closing door 208b is opened at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, the number of game balls passing through the through gate 206 is one, and the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a is It can be changed depending on the state of the open / close door 208b.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the electric player opening lottery when the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and based on the result of the electric player opening lottery. The open / close door 208b is controlled. Since the game ball GB2 that has arrived after the game ball GB1 does not pass through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 sets the opening / closing door 208b at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entry device 208. Whether the game ball GB1 has passed through the through gate 206 is determined as to whether the game ball GB1 or GB2 is to enter the second start port 208a. It is determined according to the result of the electric utility opening lottery executed and the type of support mode. Accordingly, a series of controls that control whether or not each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second start opening 208a is triggered by the passage of one game ball GB1 through the through gate 206. Can be realized.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the variation time from when the light emission display unit of the ordinary unit 38 starts the variation display until the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric component release lottery is the electric component The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the opening lottery passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing device 208. Therefore, the normal unit 38 can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the game ball GB1 that has passed the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208. Here, since the main control device 60 starts the control based on the lottery result after the lottery unit 38 displays the lottery result, the game that passed through the through gate 206 and became the trigger for the lottery. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing at which the ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the light emission display unit of the general-purpose unit 38 starts the variable display, a stop display corresponding to the winning result of the electric-powered object opening lottery is displayed, and the open / close door 208b of the open / close entrance device 208 The time until the start of the transition to the open state is the time when the first game ball GB1 that triggers the lottery to open the electric game object passes through the through gate 206 and then the game ball GB1 opens and closes the opening and closing device. It is set to be shorter than the time required to reach 208. Therefore, the main control device 60 can realize the high-frequency support mode in which the opening / closing door 208b is in an open state at the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main controller 60 changes the length of time that the open / close door 208b maintains the open state after the open / close door 208b changes from the closed state to the type of the high-frequency support mode. Since control is performed, the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 can be made different for each type of the high-frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game balls GB1 distributed to the route R1 enter the second start opening 208a, and the game balls GB2 reached after the game balls GB1 do not enter the second start opening 208a. The first high-frequency support mode (ball-out rate M1 = 0.50) and the second high-frequency support mode (ball-out rate M2 = 1.00) in which both the game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting port 208a. ) Is realized. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes with different ball-out rates, so that it is possible to add inflection to the game and improve the interest of the game.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the configuration of the second start port unit is different and that three types of high frequency support modes are set. In the following description, the configuration of the second start port unit 300 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control related to the second start port unit 300 will be mainly described. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure and process same as the said 1st-8th embodiment.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of a second start port unit 300 included in the pachinko machine according to the ninth embodiment. The second starter unit 300 includes an opening 302 into which a game ball can enter, a path R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 302, a path R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 302, A first alternating distribution mechanism 304 that distributes the game balls that have entered the opening 302 alternately between the left path R1 and the right path R2 is provided. The second starter unit 300 further includes a second alternating distribution mechanism 305 provided downstream of the path R1, a path R11 provided on the left side downstream of the second alternating distribution mechanism 305, and a second alternating vibration. And a path R12 provided on the right side downstream of the minute mechanism 305. A through gate 306 through which a game ball can pass is provided downstream of the route R11, and an opening / closing ball entering device 308 is provided downstream of the through gate 306, the route R12, and the route R2.

  The first alternating distribution mechanism 304 is configured to distribute the game balls that have entered the opening 302 alternately on the left path R1 and the right path R2. Specifically, the alternating distribution mechanism 304 includes a central piece 304a formed at the center, a left piece 304b formed on the left side of the central piece 304a, and a right side formed on the right side of the central piece 304a. One piece 304c and a rotating shaft 304d provided between the left piece 304b and the right piece 304c are provided. A region sandwiched between the central piece 304a and the left piece 304b functions as a left holding part 304e that temporarily holds a game ball. The area sandwiched between the central piece 304a and the right piece 304c functions as a right holding part 304f that temporarily holds a game ball. When the game ball arrives, the behavior of the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 is the same as the behavior of the alternating distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

  The second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is configured to distribute the game balls distributed to the route R1 alternately to the left route R11 and the right route R12. Specifically, the second alternating sorting mechanism 305 is formed at the center piece 305a formed at the center, the left piece 305b formed at the left side of the center piece 305a, and the right side of the center piece 305a. And a rotating shaft 305d provided between the left piece 305b and the right piece 305c. A region sandwiched between the central piece 305a and the left piece 305b functions as a left holding portion 305e that temporarily holds a game ball. The area sandwiched between the central piece 305a and the right piece 305c functions as a right holding part 305f that temporarily holds a game ball. When the game ball arrives, the behavior of the second alternating sorting mechanism 305 is the same as the behavior of the alternating sorting mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

  The open / close ball entry device 308 includes an open / close door 308b that opens and closes forward and backward with a lower rotation axis as a base point, and a second start port 308a into which a game ball can enter, inside the open / close door 308b. In addition, a guide path 308c inclined toward the second start port 308a is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the opening / closing door 308b is second along the guide path 308c. It is guided to the start port 308a. The 2nd starting opening 308a has the same role as the 2nd starting opening 34 in the above-mentioned embodiment. When the open / close door 308b is in a closed state, it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second start port 308a. On the other hand, when the open / close door 308b is in an open state, a game ball can enter the second start port 308a. That is, the open / close door 308b has a function of causing the state of the second start port 308a to transition between a ball entry disabled state and a ball entry enabled state. In normal times, the open / close door 308b is in a closed state, and the second start port 308a is in a state where it is impossible to enter a ball.

  The through gate 306 includes a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball passes through the through gate 306, the main controller 60 uses the internal lottery (electrical function) to determine whether or not to change the open / close door 308 b to the open state when the game ball passes through the through gate 306. Execute a product open lottery). As a result of the lottery for opening the electric component, if the winning of the opening / closing door 308b is changed to the open state, the main controller 60 displays the result of the lottery for opening the electric component on the normal unit 38 and closes the door 308b. Transition from state to open state.

  The route R11 is configured such that the distributed game ball can pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game ball has the open / close door 308b of the open / close entrance device 308 open. In such a case, the ball can enter the second starting port 308a. In the present embodiment, a route R11x branched from the route R11 is provided, but the game balls distributed to the route R11 are configured to always pass through the through gate 306. However, as another embodiment, a configuration in which the game balls distributed to the route R11 may pass through the route R11x without passing through the through gate 306 may be adopted.

  The route R2 and the route R12 are configured such that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game balls are connected to the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball entry device 308. In the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 308a.

  In this embodiment, after the game ball has passed through the through gate 306, the result of the electric player opening lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the through gate 306 is displayed by the normal diagram unit 38. The time until the game ball is through-gate (ie, the variable time from when the light emission display unit of the normal unit 38 starts the variable display until the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric player opening lottery) The time is set shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through 306 until the game ball reaches the opening and closing device 308. Specifically, in this embodiment, since the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 until the game ball reaches the opening / closing entrance device 308 is about 0.2 seconds, the normal unit 38 Is set to 0.05 seconds.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is the time from when the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is displayed by the normal unit 38 until the opening and closing door 208b of the opening and closing device 208 starts a transition from the closed state to the open state. There is no open waiting time. Therefore, in this embodiment, when winning is performed in the electric utility opening lottery, the opening / closing door 208b is closed immediately after the fluctuation of the normal drawing unit 38 is finished and the result of the electric bonus opening lottery is displayed by the normal drawing unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state is started.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described eighth embodiment, the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state after the result of the electric character opening lottery is displayed by the normal unit 38. Until then, there is a time required for the control of about 0.004 seconds. However, in addition to the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 and the waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b, the game can be taken into consideration. The time from when the ball passes through the through gate 306 until the opening and closing door 308b of the opening and closing ball entry device 308 starts transition from the closed state to the open state, The time is set shorter than the time required for the game ball to reach the opening / closing entrance device 308.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the through gate 306 and is elected in the electric actor release lottery, the main controller 60 opens and closes the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric agent open lottery. Prior to the timing to reach the ball device 308, the open / close door 308b is changed from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric player opening lottery is entered into the second start opening 308a provided inside the opening / closing door 308b when the electric player opening lottery is won. Will do.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high-frequency support mode, a second high-frequency support mode, and a third high-frequency support mode as types of the high-frequency support mode for controlling the door 308b. ing. In the first high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the open / close door 308b is opened once and the opening time is 0 when winning in the electric agent opening lottery. .5 seconds is set. In the second high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%, and the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is 1 when winning in the electric agent opening lottery. It is set to 1 second. In the third high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric accessory opening lottery is set to 100%. When winning in the electric accessory opening lottery, the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is one. .7 seconds is set. That is, the difference in the first to third high-frequency support modes is the length of time that the open / close door 308b maintains the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the trajectory of the game ball when the game ball enters the second start port unit 300. FIG. In the case where the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 provided in the second start port unit 300 is tilted to the right and the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is tilted to the right, the first When the game ball GB1 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 by the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and to the path R11 by the second alternating distribution mechanism 305. As a result, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306 and enters the second start port 308a provided inside the opening / closing door 308b if the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing device 308 is open. It will be. That is, the trajectory of the first game ball GB1 is the trajectory L1 shown in FIG.

  When the second game ball GB2 following the game ball GB1 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB2 is distributed to the path R2 by the first alternating distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 308 without passing through the through gate 306. If the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing entrance device 308 is open, it is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. The second starting opening 308a is entered. That is, the trajectory of the second game ball GB2 is a trajectory L2 shown in FIG.

  When the third game ball GB3 following the game ball GB2 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB3 is distributed to the path R1 by the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and the path by the second alternating distribution mechanism 305. Sorted to R12. As a result, the game ball GB3 does not pass through the through gate 306 and reaches the open / close ball entrance device 308. If the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball entrance device 308 is open, the game ball GB3 is provided inside the open / close door 308b. The second starting opening 308a is entered. That is, the trajectory of the third game ball GB3 is a trajectory L3 shown in FIG.

  When the fourth game ball GB4 following the game ball GB3 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB4 is distributed to the path R2 by the first alternating distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB4 does not pass through the through gate 306 and reaches the opening / closing entrance device 308. If the opening / closing door 308b of the opening / closing entrance device 308 is open, the game ball GB4 is provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. The second starting opening 308a is entered. That is, the locus of the fourth game ball GB4 is a locus L4 shown in FIG.

  In a situation where the fifth game ball following the game ball GB4 enters from the opening 302, the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 is inclined to the right side, and the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is It is tilted to the right. Therefore, the trajectory of the fifth game ball is the same as the trajectory L1 of the first game ball GB1. That is, the second start port unit 300 of this embodiment returns to the original state when four game balls enter.

  Here, in the situation where the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starter unit 300 by the game ball launching mechanism 81, the above-described first The case where the 1st-3rd high frequency support mode is performed is demonstrated.

  In the case where the first high-frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric-powered object opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%. When the winning combination is selected, the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is set to 0.5 seconds. Accordingly, the opening / closing door 308b is in an open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 308, but the second to fourth game balls GB2 to GB4. Is in a closed state at the timing of reaching the opening and closing ball entry device 308. As a result, when the first high-frequency support mode is executed, the second start in which only the first game ball GB1 is provided inside the door 308b among the four game balls GB1 to GB4. It will enter the mouth 308a.

  In the case where the second high-frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric player opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%. When the winning combination is selected, the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is 1.1 seconds. Therefore, the opening / closing door 308b is in an open state at the timing when the first game ball GB1 passing through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing ball entering device 308 and at the timing when the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entering device 308. However, at the timing when the third to fourth game balls GB3 to GB4 reach the opening and closing ball entry device 308, they are in a closed state. As a result, when the second high-frequency support mode is executed, the first and second game balls GB1 and GB2 are provided inside the opening / closing door 308b among the four game balls GB1 to GB4. The second starting opening 308a is entered.

  In the case where the third high-frequency support mode is executed, the probability of winning in the electric player opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is set to 100%. When the winning combination is selected, the opening / closing door 308b is opened once and the opening time is set to 1.7 seconds. Accordingly, the opening / closing door 308b has a timing at which the first game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 308, a timing at which the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 308, and a third one. The game ball GB3 is in an open state at the timing when it reaches the opening / closing ball entering device 308, but is closed at a timing when the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening / closing ball entering device 308. As a result, when the third high-frequency support mode is executed, among the four game balls GB1 to GB4, the first to third game balls GB1 to GB3 are provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. The ball enters the second starting port 308a.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a sorting table in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 80, for reference, the types and contents of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode are also described. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the type of the high frequency support mode executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the first high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode, and the third high frequency support mode are provided. Is set. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second start opening 308a is set to two.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 is won and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0-9, 8R A transition to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is made, and a transition to the first high frequency support mode is made after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 25 to 29, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot and shifts to the third high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (b), when the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second start port 308a is won and the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, A transition to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is made, and a transition to the first high-frequency support mode is made after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot and shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot and shifts to the second high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot and shifts to the third high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Here, the game balls were fired in a situation where they were continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starter unit 300 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls is defined as the start rate, and the start rate when the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high-frequency support mode is executed. It is defined as the sphericity Mi. In the following, the turnout rate M1 when the first high frequency support mode is executed, the ball turnout rate M2 when the second high frequency support mode is executed, and the second high frequency support mode are executed. The ball exit rate M3 in this case will be described.

In the first high-frequency support mode, a game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starter unit 300 by the game ball launch mechanism 81 Then, as described above, one of the four game balls fired enters the second start opening 308a of the open / close ball entry device 308, and the two game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the ball exit rate M1 when the first high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M1 = 2/4 = 0.50

  Here, the ball exit rate of less than 1 means that the game ball can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined launch strength and continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds. This means that the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Therefore, the first high-frequency support mode means that the number of game balls held by the player is reduced. Specifically, in the first high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds, and two game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will decrease at a rate of 2 in 2.4 seconds (1 rate in 1.2 seconds).

In the second high-frequency support mode, a game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 300 by the game ball launch mechanism 81 Then, as described above, two game balls out of the four game balls fired enter the second start opening 308a of the opening and closing ball entry device 308, and the four game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the turnout rate M2 when the second high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M2 = 4/4 = 1.00

  Here, the ball exit rate of 1 means that the game ball can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81 and is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. This means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease in the fired situation. Therefore, in the second high-frequency support mode, it means that the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds, and four game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will not increase or decrease.

In the third high-frequency support mode, a game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds at a predetermined launch intensity that can reach the second starter unit 300 by the game ball launch mechanism 81 Then, as described above, of the four game balls that have been launched, three game balls enter the second start port 308a of the opening / closing entrance device 308, and six game balls are paid out as prize balls. It will be. Therefore, the turnout rate M3 when the third high-frequency support mode is executed is as follows.
M3 = 6/4 = 1.50

  Here, the ball exit rate exceeding 1 indicates that the game ball can reach the second starting port unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81 and is continuously emitted at intervals of 0.6 seconds. This means that the number of game balls held by the player increases. Therefore, the third high-frequency support mode means that the number of game balls held by the player increases. Specifically, in the third high-frequency support mode, 4 game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds and 6 game balls are paid out as prize balls. It increases at a rate of 2 in 2.4 seconds (1 rate in 1.2 seconds).

  Further, PAi is defined as a ratio of executing the i-th high-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33. To do. Then, the ratio PA1 at which the first high frequency support mode is executed, the ratio PA2 at which the second high frequency support mode is executed, and the ratio PA3 at which the third high frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PA1 = number of jackpot type counter C2 (0 to 19) / hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 and shift to the first high frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 20/30
PA2 = number of jackpot type counter C2 (20 to 24) / hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 and shift to the second high frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 5/30
PA3 = number of jackpot type counter C2 (25 to 29) / hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the first start port 33 and shift to the third high frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 5/30

  In addition, when the high-frequency support is executed by winning the big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33, the total ball-out rate is defined as the first total ball-out rate T1. The first overall appearance rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (3).

  In the above formula (3), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in this embodiment, n = 3. Accordingly, the first total ball exit rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2 + M3 × PA3
= 0.50 × (20/30) + 1.00 × (5/30) + 1.50 × (5/30)
= 0.75

  In other words, the first total pitching rate T1 is the sum of the pitching rate of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 multiplied by the execution rate, It means the expected value of sphere.

  Further, PBi is defined as the ratio of executing the i-th high-frequency support mode when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second start port 308a. To do. Then, the rate PB1 at which the first high-frequency support mode is executed, the rate PB2 at which the second high-frequency support mode is executed, and the rate PB3 at which the third high-frequency support mode is executed are as follows.

PB1 = the number of jackpot type counter C2 (0 to 11) / hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 308a and shift to the first high-frequency support mode Total number of values of type counter C2 = 12/30
PB2 = number of jackpot type counter C2 (12 to 20) / hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second start port 308a and shift to the second high frequency support mode Total number of types counter C2 = 9/30
PB3 = number of jackpot type counter C2 (21 to 29) / big hit that will win the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 308a and shift to the third high-frequency support mode Total number of types counter C2 = 9/30

  Further, when the high-frequency support is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 308a, the total ball-out rate is defined as the second total ball-out rate T2. The second total turnout rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (4).

  In the above formula (4), n is the number of types of high-frequency support mode, and in this embodiment, n = 3. Accordingly, the second total ball exit rate T2 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2 + M3 × PB3
= 0.50 × (12/30) + 1.00 × (6/30) + 1.50 × (6/30)
= 0.95

  In other words, the second overall pitch rate T2 is the sum of the high rate support mode executed based on the game balls entering the second start port 308a multiplied by the execution rate. It means the expected value of sphere.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the third high frequency support mode in which the starting rate exceeds 1 can be executed, the value of the first total starting rate T1 and the second total starting rate T2 All of the values are less than 1. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

  Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that in the eighth embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing will be omitted.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a winning opening process for the start port executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment. Below, a difference with the process (FIG. 10, FIG. 74) which the main control apparatus 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the said 1st, 8th embodiment performs is demonstrated.

  In step S4706, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment sets a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out two game balls. The processing in other steps is the same as the processing (FIGS. 10 and 74) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and eighth embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, which is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 75) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is the first to third high-frequency support corresponding to each of the three types of high-frequency support modes. It is a point that stores a flag. The first to third high-frequency support flags are used to determine whether or not the first to third high-frequency support modes are being executed. This will be specifically described below.

  In step S4801, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 as the big hit type flag.

  If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: YES), the process proceeds to step S4802, and the flag erasing process is executed. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying the gaming state. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, the first high frequency support flag, the second high frequency support flag, and the third high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, When these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. After executing step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4803.

  In step S4803, the high probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S4804 to store the third high frequency support flag. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is finished, the winning / raising lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the gaming state in which the third high frequency support mode is set. Note that the high probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4805.

  In step S4805, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4806, and the third high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, is sent to the sound emission control device 90. Set as the command to be sent. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the third high-frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect that suggests to the player that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the third high-frequency support mode, for example, an effect suggesting that it is advantageous for the player even in a situation where game balls are increasing and it is difficult to win a big hit Can be mentioned.

  If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R probability variation flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: NO), the process proceeds to step S4807, and it is determined whether or not the 8R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 as a big hit type flag. judge. If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: YES), the process proceeds to step S4808, and the flag erasing process is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4809.

  In step S4809, the high probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S4810 to store the second high frequency support flag. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is ended, the winning / raising lottery mode is the high probability mode, and the support mode is the gaming state in which the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4811.

  In step S4811, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4812, and the second high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, is sent to the sound emission control device 90. Set as the command to be sent. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the second high-frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect suggesting that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the second high-frequency support mode, for example, the game ball is not increasing or decreasing, and even if it is difficult to win, it is not disadvantageous for the player The suggestion can be given.

  If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R probability variation flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: NO), the process proceeds to step S4813, and the flag erasing process is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4814.

  In step S4814, after storing the first high frequency support flag, the process proceeds to step S4815, and “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the game number counter area is a value indicating the number of games when the first high frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the gaming mode is the first high frequency support mode. However, in this case, the first high-frequency support mode ends after the game times are executed 100 times, and thereafter, the normal lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. Transition. After executing Step S4815, the process proceeds to Step S4816.

  In step S4816, the first high-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set as command. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated. The sound emission control device 90 that has received the first high-frequency support command starts control so as to execute an effect that suggests to the player that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode. As an effect suggesting that the support mode is the first high-frequency support mode, for example, an effect suggesting that a situation in which the game ball is decreasing and it is difficult to win is a disadvantage for the player Can do.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the electrical combination opening / closing process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the process (FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that a different opening time is set for each of the three types of high frequency support modes. This will be specifically described below.

  In step S4901, it is determined whether the open / close door 308b as the electric accessory is being opened. Whether or not the open / close door 308b is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the open / close door 308b is opened (S4901: YES), the process proceeds to step S4902.

  In step S4902, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration time of the open / close door 308b. If it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S4902: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. That is, when the opening continuation time of the opening / closing door 308b has not ended, the main utility opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S4902: YES), the process proceeds to step S4903 to perform a closing process for controlling the open / close door 308b to a closed state. 2. Set "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration time of the opening / closing door 308b is “0”, the opening / closing door 308b is closed and this time the second timer counter area T2 is now opened / closed by the opening / closing door 308b. This is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of, and “25” is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing Step S4903, the process proceeds to Step S4904.

  In step S4904, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S4905, where it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S4905: NO), the main role opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S4905: YES), the process proceeds to step S4906, and the supporting flag is deleted. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4901 that the open / close door 308b is not open (S4901: NO), the process advances to step S4907 to determine whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the open / close door 308b. If it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4907: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S4907: YES), the process proceeds to step S4908, and an opening process for controlling the open / close door 308b to the open state is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4909.

  In step S4909, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed. If it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is not being performed (S4909: NO), the process proceeds to step S4910, and whether or not the first high frequency support mode is being performed. Determine whether.

  If it is determined in step S4910 that the first high-frequency support mode is in effect (S4910: YES), the process proceeds to step S4911, and “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4910 that the first high-frequency support mode is not in effect (S4910: NO), the process proceeds to step S4912, and it is determined whether the second high-frequency support mode is in effect.

  If it is determined in step S4912 that the second high-frequency support mode is in effect (S4912: YES), the flow proceeds to step S4913, and “550” (that is, 1.1 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4912 that the second high-frequency support mode is not in effect (S4912: NO), the process proceeds to step S4914 to determine whether or not the third high-frequency support mode is in effect.

  If it is determined in step S4914 that the mode is the third high-frequency support mode (S4914: YES), the process proceeds to step S4915, and “850” (ie, 1.7 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4909 that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed (S4909: YES), or if it is determined in step S4914 that the third high-frequency support mode is not being performed (S4914: NO), the process proceeds to step S4916. Then, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first game ball GB1 distributed to the route R11 can pass through the through gate 306 and the open / close door 308b is open. It is possible to enter the second starting port 308a. On the other hand, the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that have arrived after the first game ball GB1 are distributed to the route R2 or the route R12, and therefore cannot pass through the through gate 306 and are opened and closed. When the door 308b is in an open state, it is possible to enter the second starting port 308a. That is, among the four game balls, only the first game ball GB1 can pass through the through gate 306, and each of the four game balls enters the second start port 308a. Whether or not to enter the ball depends on whether or not the opening / closing door 308b is in an open state at the timing when each of the four gaming balls reaches the opening and closing device 308. Therefore, among the four game balls, the number of game balls passing through the through gate 306 is one, and the number of game balls entering the second start opening 308a varies depending on the state of the open / close door 308b. Can be made.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 controls the open / close door 308b based on the result of the electric character opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 306. Since the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that have arrived after the first game ball GB1 do not pass through the through gate 306, the main controller 60 causes each of the four game balls to enter the open / close ball entry device 308. Whether the open / close door 308b is in the closed state or in the open state at the arrived timing, that is, whether or not each of the four game balls is to enter the second start opening 308a. It is determined according to the result of the electrified object opening lottery executed when the ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306 and the type of support mode. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the four game balls enters the second start opening 308a is realized by a series of controls triggered by the passing of the first game ball GB1 through the through gate 306. can do.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the variation time from when the light emission display unit of the ordinary unit 38 starts the variation display until the stop display corresponding to the result of the electric component release lottery is the electric component The time is set to be shorter than the time from when the first game ball GB1 that triggered the opening lottery passes through the through gate 206 until the game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing device 208. Accordingly, the normal figure unit 38 opens the electric game object before the timing when the first game ball GB1 that has passed the through gate 306 and triggered the electric game open lottery reaches the opening and closing device 308. The lottery result can be displayed. Here, the main controller 60 starts the control based on the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery after the normal unit 38 displays the result of the electric-powered object opening lottery. Thus, before the timing at which the first game ball GB1 that triggered the opening of the electric game object opening lottery 308 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 308, the control based on the result of the electric game object opening lottery can be started. As a result, the main control device 60 realizes the high-frequency support mode in which the opening / closing door 308b is opened at the timing when the first game ball GB1 passing through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 308. Is possible.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 is configured so that the time length for maintaining the open state after the open / close door 208b transitions from the closed state to the open state is different for each type of the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a among the four game balls GB1 to GB4 can be made different for each type of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first game ball GB1 enters the second start port 308a, and the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that arrive after the game ball GB1 are the second start ports. The first high-frequency support mode that does not enter 308a (the exit rate M1 = 0.50), and the first and second game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second start port 308a and the third And the fourth game ball GB3, GB4 is the second high-frequency support mode in which the ball does not enter the second start port 308a (the exit rate M2 = 1.00), the first to third game balls GB1, GB2 and GB3 enter the second start opening 308a, and the fourth game ball GB4 realizes the third high-frequency support mode (the exit rate M3 = 1.50) that does not enter the second start opening 308a. Has been. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes with different ball-out rates can be realized, so that inflection can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the alternate distribution mechanism (the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and the second alternate distribution mechanism 305) that alternately distributes the game balls to any one of the two paths is provided in two stages. Therefore, one game ball GB1 that has reached the second starting port unit 300 is distributed to the route R11, and three game balls GB1, GB2, that have arrived after the game ball GB1, The function of distributing GB3 to a route (routes R2, R12) different from the route R11 can be realized with a simple configuration as compared with a configuration that uses electronic control or the like. In addition, as a structure which implement | achieves the said function using electronic control etc., for example, the structure which measures the number of game balls which reached | attained the 2nd starting port unit 300 using a counter etc., and drives with an electric force The structure which distributes a game ball using etc. can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as the type of the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is executed even though the third high frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1 can be executed. Since the total pitch rate (the first total pitch rate T1 and the second total pitch rate T2) is less than 1, the player is given a sense of excitement in the third high frequency support mode in which game balls increase. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the player's euphoria by suppressing the first total pitch rate T1 and the second total pitch rate T2 to less than 1 while making it possible. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls held by the player increases during the period in which the third high-frequency support mode in which the turn-out rate exceeds 1 is being executed. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the third high-frequency support mode is desired to continue for a long time. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is won, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts to the high probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode is executed. The high-probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode continue until the next jackpot lottery is won. In other words, the high probability mode does not end until the next jackpot lottery is won (so-called loop machine), so it is guaranteed that you win the jackpot lottery during the high probability mode, and until you win the jackpot lottery, The third high frequency support mode in which game balls increase will continue. Therefore, since the player is guaranteed to win the jackpot lottery during the high probability mode, the third high frequency support mode is desired to continue for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery for as long as possible. You will have a sense of expectation. Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a new sense of expectation that the third high-frequency support mode is desired to continue for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery for as long as possible during the high probability mode. Because it can, you can improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in such a configuration, if the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode is set low, the probability that the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode will continue for a long time increases. Therefore, the expected value of the number of game balls that can be increased in the third high-frequency support mode can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode adopt a configuration (so-called special time machine (ST machine)) that ends after a predetermined number (for example, 120) of big hit lottery is executed, The player wants to increase the number of game balls by continuing the third high-frequency support mode for as long as possible, and therefore expects that he / she does not want to win the jackpot lottery in the game times shortly after entering the high probability mode. And, before the high probability mode ends, you will have a sense of expectation that you want to win a jackpot lottery.

  And if the player wins the jackpot lottery shortly after the transition to the high probability mode, the player feels unfortunate that the third high-frequency support mode has ended in a short period of time. So, after all, the high probability mode will be over, and you will be satisfied that you have won the jackpot lottery. In addition, if the big win lottery is won in the game round just before the high probability mode ends, the player can continue the third high-frequency support mode for a long period of time and can greatly increase the number of game balls. Satisfaction and satisfaction such as winning the big hit lottery before the high probability mode ends. In other words, when the big win lottery is won in the game game just before the high probability mode ends, the player can enjoy double satisfaction. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is not won by the end of the high probability mode, the player is satisfied that the third high-frequency support mode has continued for a long period of time and that the number of game balls can be greatly increased. On the other hand, while having a feeling, we will have a disappointing feeling that we did not win the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ended. That is, since it is possible to provide a player with complex inflections in the high probability mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, another example of the configuration of the second start port unit will be described. As described below, various configurations can be adopted as the second starter unit.

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory view schematically showing another example of the configuration of the second start port unit. For reference, FIG. 84 (A) schematically shows the second starter port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 84 shows the order of game balls that have entered the second start port unit and the distribution destination.

  FIG. 84 (B) schematically shows the second start port unit 300B as Example 1. The difference from the second starting port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84 (A) is that the game balls distributed to the route R2 are the second starting port 308a even when the open / close door 308b is open. The point is that it is impossible to enter the ball. Specifically, since the horizontal length of the opening and closing ball entry device 308 is shortened, the second and fourth game balls regardless of the control mode of the opening and closing door 308b in each high-frequency support mode. Cannot enter the second starting port 308a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls entering the second start port 308a among the game balls entering the opening 302 of the second start port unit 300.

  FIG. 84C schematically shows the second start port unit 300C as Example 2. FIG. 85 shows a specific configuration of the second start port unit 300C. A difference from the second starter port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 84A and 78 is that the route R2 and the route R12 merge to form one route. According to such a configuration, since the second start port unit can be reduced in size, the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

  FIG. 84D schematically shows a second start port unit 300D as Example 3. The difference from the second start port unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84A is that a third alternating sorting mechanism 305A is provided downstream of the second alternating sorting mechanism 305. is there. The third alternating distribution mechanism 305A distributes the game balls flowing down the route R11 alternately between the left route R111 and the right route R112.

  The route R111 is configured such that the distributed game ball passes through the through gate 306, and the distributed game ball is second when the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball entry device 308 is open. It is configured to be able to enter the starting port 308a. The route R112 is configured such that the distributed game ball cannot pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed game ball is opened when the open / close door 308b of the open / close entrance device 308 is open. In some cases, the ball can enter the second starting port 308a.

  According to such a configuration, only one game ball passes through the through gate 306 out of the eight game balls that have entered the opening 302 of the second start port unit 300D. In other words, after one game ball passes through the through gate 306, the subsequent seven game balls do not pass through the through gate 306, and the ninth game ball passes through the through gate 306 again. Therefore, by setting the opening time of the opening / closing door 308b to a different length for each high-frequency support mode, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 308a can be set to any number from 1 to 8 Can be set to a value. For example, when the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as a prize ball when one game ball enters the second start opening 308a is set to two, the following eight types High frequency support mode can be realized.

・ First high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 0.5 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 1/8 pieces Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 1 × 2 = 2 Increase / decrease in game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls decrease in 4.8 seconds Pitch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 2 / 8 = 0.25

-Second high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 2 × 2 = 4 Increase / decrease in game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls decrease in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 4 / 8 = 0.50

・ Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 3 × 2 = 6 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls are reduced by 2 in 4.8 seconds. Rate of play: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 6 / 8 = 0.75

・ Fourth frequent support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 2.3 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 4/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 4 × 2 = 8 Increase / decrease in game balls: No increase / decrease Rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 8/8 = 1.00

・ Fifth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 5/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 5 × 2 = 10 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls are increased by 2 in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 10 / 8 = 1.25

-Sixth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 6/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 6 × 2 = 12 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 Game balls increase by 4 seconds 8.8 Ball throw rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 12 / 8 = 1.50

-Seventh high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 7 × 2 = 14 Increase / decrease in game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls increase in 6 seconds 4.8 Ball throw rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 14 / 8 = 1.75

・ Eighth frequent support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 8/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 8 × 2 = 16 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 Game balls increase by 8 in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 16 / 8 = 2.00

  Thus, if the configuration of the second start port unit 300D is employed, the type of the high frequency support mode can be set in multiple stages. If the alternate distribution mechanism is further configured in multiple stages, the number of game balls that do not pass through the through gate 306 can be further increased, and the type of the high-frequency support mode can be set in more stages. It becomes possible. Further, the number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as a prize ball when one game ball enters the second start port 308a can be set to a value other than one or two. For example, when three prize balls are set in the above eight types of high-frequency support modes, each high-frequency support mode is as follows.

・ First high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 0.5 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 1/8 pieces Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 1 × 3 = 3 Increase / decrease in game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls are reduced by 5 in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 3 / 8 = 0.375

-Second high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 2 × 3 = 6 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls are reduced by 2 in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 6 / 8 = 0.75

・ Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 3 × 3 = 9 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls increase by 1 in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 9 / 8 = 1.125

・ Fourth frequent support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 2.3 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 4/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 4 × 3 = 12 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls increase in 4 seconds Ball throw rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 12 / 8 = 1.50

・ Fifth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 2.9 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 5/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 5 × 3 = 15 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 Game balls increase by 7 in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 15 / 8 = 1.875

-Sixth high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 3.5 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 6/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 6 × 3 = 18 increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls are increased by 10 in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 18 / 8 = 2.25

-Seventh high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 4.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 7/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 7 × 3 = 21 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 Game balls increase by 13 in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 21 / 8 = 2.625

・ Eighth frequent support mode:
Opening time of the open / close door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 8/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of prize balls: 8 × 3 = 24 Increase / decrease of game balls: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 game balls increase by 16 in 4.8 seconds Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 24 / 8 = 3.00

  FIG. 84 (E) schematically shows a second start port unit 300E as Example 4. The difference from the second starter port unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. 84 (D) is that the game balls distributed to the route R2 enter the second starter port 308a even when the open / close door 308b is open. The point is that it is impossible to sphere. Specifically, since the horizontal length of the opening and closing ball entry device 308 is shortened, the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth pieces regardless of the control mode of the opening and closing door 308b in each high-frequency support mode. The game ball cannot enter the second start port 308a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls entering the second start port 308a among the game balls entering the opening 302 of the second start port unit 300E.

  FIG. 84 (F) schematically shows the second start port unit 300F as Example 5. The difference from the second starter port unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. 84D is that the route R2, the route R12, and the route R112 merge to form one route. According to such a configuration, since the second start port unit can be reduced in size, the mountability on the game board 30 can be improved.

J. et al. Tenth embodiment:
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second start port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the eighth embodiment. The difference from the eighth embodiment is that the mode for controlling the open / close door 208b is different. Below, the aspect of control of the door 208b is mainly demonstrated. The description of the same configuration and processing as those in the eighth embodiment is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, one type of high frequency support mode is set, and there are two types of winning when the electrification opening lottery is won during the high frequency support mode (first type electric utility release and first type 2 types of electric utility release) is set. In addition, one type of winning combination (the third type opening of the electric combination) is set when the electric combination release lottery is won during the low frequency support mode. The details of the control time of the open / close door 208b for each type of variation of the usual figure unit 38 and the winning type of the electrification opening lottery are as follows.

・ Lottery for opening an electric accessory during the high-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the usual figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning the prize, the percentage allocated to the opening of the 1st class electric role: 50%
As a result of winning the prize, the percentage allocated to the second-class power release: 50%
-If the elected first-class electric role is won: Opening / closing door 208b waiting time: 0.05 seconds Opening / closing door 208b opening time: 1 time Opening / closing door 208b opening time: 0.8 seconds Opening and closing door 208b waiting time: 0.25 seconds Opening and closing door 208b opening times: 1 time Opening and closing door 208b opening time: 0.8 seconds

-Opening lottery for electric equipment during low frequency support mode Fluctuation time of ordinary figure unit 38: 29.5 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning the prize, the percentage allocated to the third-class power release: 100%
-When elected to open the third class electric role Opening / closing door 208b waiting time: 0.25 seconds Opening / closing door 208b: 1 opening time Opening / closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

  In the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b described above, the difference between the case where the first type power combination is won during the high-frequency support mode and the case where the second type power combination is won is shown in the fluctuation display of the ordinary unit 38. Is the length of the waiting time for opening, which is the time from when the door stops to when the opening / closing door 208b starts to enter the open state. As will be described later, the game ball is released at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the game ball launching mechanism 81. The number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is different in a situation where the ball is continuously fired. The time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds which is the firing interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game. The time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

  FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second start-up unit 200 when winning the first type electrification opening. FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball-injecting device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b when the first type electrification opening is won. In the example shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the game ball can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a constant launch intensity. Fired continuously at 0.6 second intervals. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  As shown in state A1 in FIG. 86, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting port unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting port unit 200 from the opening 202, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is reached. In the example shown in the state A1, since the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the right side, the game ball that has reached the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held in the left holding unit 204e. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding unit 204e, and the state shown in FIG. A2.

  As shown in state A2 of FIG. 86, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding part 204e falls from the left holding part 204e, and the left path R1 It is distributed to. Thereafter, the game balls GB1 distributed to the route R1 pass through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes the electric accessory release lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 during the high-frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electrification opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode. Is set to 100%. When the first type electric combination opening is won in the electric combination opening lottery, the opening / closing door 208b is opened for 0.05 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is opened once, and the opening time is 0. Set to 8 seconds. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the main control device 60 determines that the opening standby time has elapsed (FIG. 91: S5123 described later), the main control device 60 starts transition to the open state of the door 208b. The process to be performed is executed not in the power switch opening / closing process in the next tour executed in a cycle of 0.004 seconds but in the power switch opening / closing process in the same tour (FIG. 91: S5124, FIG. 92 described later). For this reason, the time required for the control from when the opening standby time elapses until the opening / closing door 208b of the opening and closing ball entry device 208 starts transitioning to the open state is much shorter than 0.004 seconds. Yes.

  Accordingly, the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entry device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.1 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (FIG. 87). As described above, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208 is about 0.2 seconds. At the timing when the passed game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, the open / close door 208b is in an open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second start port 208a. Thereafter, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and a state A3 in FIG. 86 is obtained.

  As shown in state A3 in FIG. 86, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held in the right holding unit 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding unit 204f, and the state A4 in FIG. It becomes.

  As shown in state A4 of FIG. 86, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding part 204f falls from the right holding part 204f, and the right path R2 It is distributed to. Thereafter, the game balls GB2 distributed to the route R2 reach the opening / closing entrance device 208. Here, in this embodiment, since the interval between the game balls fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, the game ball GB2 opens and closes after the game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing device 208. The interval until reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. In this embodiment, since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b maintains the opened state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208. . As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second start opening 208a provided inside the opening / closing ball entry device 208. After the game ball GB2 enters the second start port 208a, the open / close door 208b is closed and again enters the state A1. Since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, as shown in FIG. 87, the opening / closing door 208b is positioned before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206. In a closed state.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in a situation where a game ball is continuously fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined launch strength that can reach the second starter unit 200 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. In the case of winning the first type of power combination opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode lottery, the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric component opening lottery will reach the opening and closing ball entry device 208. The open / close door 208b is in the open state, and the open / close door 208b is maintained in the open state even at the timing when the game balls GB2 distributed to the route R2 reach the open / close entrance device 208. As a result, both game balls out of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second start opening 208a.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the behavior of the second start port unit 200 when winning the second-type power combination opening. FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball-injecting device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the case of winning the second-type power combination opening. The example shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 is different from the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 in that the open / close door 208b has a waiting time for opening of 0.25 seconds and passes through the through gate 206. The game ball GB1 does not enter the second start port 208a. This will be specifically described below.

  As shown in state A1 in FIG. 88, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starter unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starter unit 200 through the opening 202, it reaches the alternate sorting mechanism 204. In the example shown in the state A1, since the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the right side, the game ball that has reached the alternating distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held in the left holding unit 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left holding unit 204e, and enters the state A2. .

  As shown in state A2 of FIG. 88, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the left, the game ball GB1 held by the left holding part 204e falls from the left holding part 204e, and the left path R1 It is distributed to. Thereafter, the game balls GB1 distributed to the route R1 pass through the through gate 206. When the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes the electric accessory release lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 during the high-frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electrification opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode. Is set to 100%. When the first type electric combination opening is won in the electric combination opening lottery, the opening / closing door 208b has an opening waiting time of 0.25 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is opened once, and the opening time is 0. Set to 8 seconds. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the time required for the control from the elapse of the opening waiting time until the opening / closing door 208b of the opening / closing entrance device 208 starts to enter the open state is 0.004. The time is significantly shorter than seconds.

  Therefore, the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entry device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.3 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (FIG. 89). As described above, in the present embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the game ball reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208 is about 0.2 seconds. At the timing when the passed game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, the opening and closing door 208b maintains a closed state, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second start opening 208a and the opening and closing ball entry device. Pass 208. Thereafter, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and a state A3 in FIG. 88 is obtained.

  As shown in state A3 in FIG. 88, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the left. Therefore, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held in the right holding unit 204f. Then, the alternating distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) about the rotation shaft 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding unit 204f, and enters the state A4.

  As shown in state A4 in FIG. 88, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is tilted to the right, the game ball GB2 held by the right holding part 204f falls from the right holding part 204f, and the right path R2 It is distributed to. Thereafter, the game balls GB2 distributed to the route R2 reach the opening / closing entrance device 208. Here, in this embodiment, since the interval between the game balls fired from the game ball launching mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, the game ball GB2 opens and closes after the game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing device 208. The interval until reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. In this embodiment, since the opening / closing waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds, the opening / closing door 208b is open at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208. . As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second start opening 208a provided inside the opening / closing ball entry device 208. After the game ball GB2 enters the second start port 208a, the open / close door 208b is closed and again enters the state A1. Since the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, as shown in FIG. 89, the opening / closing door 208b is positioned before the game ball GB3 next to the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206. In a closed state.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in a situation where a game ball is continuously fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined launch strength that can reach the second starter unit 200 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. In the case of winning the second kind of electric combination opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode open lottery, at the timing when the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric combination opening lottery reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208 The open / close door 208b maintains the closed state, and at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the open / close ball entering device 208, the open / close door 208b is in the open state. As a result, one game ball GB2 out of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second start opening 208a.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the opening waiting time of the open / close door 208b, the first time around 1.2 seconds (FIGS. 87 and 89) after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206. 2 The number of game balls entering the start opening 208a can be changed.

  In the case where the third-type power combination opening is won in the electric component opening lottery during the low-frequency support mode, the variation time of the normal unit 38 is 29.5 seconds, and the opening waiting time of the open / close door 208b is 0.00. Since it is set to 25 seconds, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state after the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 have passed through the open / close ball entry device 208. That is, in the case where the third type electric combination release is won in the electric combination release lottery during the low frequency support mode, both the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 do not enter the second start opening 208a.

  Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that in the eighth embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing will be omitted.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, which is executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 75) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that the high frequency support mode is one type in the present embodiment, so the high frequency support flag is used. The type is not set. This will be specifically described below.

  In step S5004, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment stores a high frequency support flag. Thus, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is finished, the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. In addition, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment stores a high frequency support flag in step S5007. Thus, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the support mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the high-frequency support mode is set. The processing in the other steps is the same as the processing (FIG. 75) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the electric power support process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 76) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that the waiting time for opening corresponding to the type of opening of the winning combination won in the winning combination of opening of the winning combination. It is a point to set. This will be specifically described below.

  In step S5101, it is determined whether support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supporting flag is stored in a supporting flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S5101 that the supporting flag is not stored (S5101: NO), the process proceeds to step S5102.

  In step S5102, it is determined whether a support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storing areas 64e of the RAM 64. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the winning combination is won in the electric player opening lottery, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored. If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is not stored (S5102: NO), the process proceeds to step S5103.

  In step S5103, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, every 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S5103 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S5103: NO), the main role support process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S5103: YES), the process proceeds to step S5104.

  In step S5104, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the normal unit 38. In step S5104, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (S5104: YES), the process proceeds to step S5105, and after setting the off display, the main role support process is terminated. By setting the out-of-display, the symbol change display in the general-purpose unit 38 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5104 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S5104: NO), the process proceeds to step S5106.

  In step S5106, it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory reservation number SN is greater than “0”. If it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is “0” (S5106: NO), the main character support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the reserved item SN SN is greater than “0” (S5106: YES), the process proceeds to step S5107.

  In step S5107, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S5108 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S5107 (S5107: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step S5108 (S5108: YES), the process proceeds to step S5109, and an electric-powered object opening lottery is performed. Specifically, the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted to the lottery execution area, and the value in the lottery execution area is collated with the table for electric character release lottery for the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electric component release lottery during the high-frequency support mode is set to 100%, the proportion allocated to the first type electric service release is 50%, and the second type electric service release is performed. The distribution ratio is set to 50%. Specifically, since the value that the electric accessory release counter C4 can take is 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 124, When it is elected to open the first-type electric combination and the value of the electric combination release counter C4 is 125 to 249, the second-type electric combination is won. Then, after executing the electric character release lottery, “25” (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5110.

  In step S5110, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric component release lottery in step S5109 is a win for electric role release (support win). In step S5110, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for opening the electrical equipment is support winning (S5110: YES), the process proceeds to step S5111, where a support winning flag is stored and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2. In the present embodiment, when the electrification of opening of the electric utility item during the high frequency support mode is won, the first type of winning electoration flag is stored, and the second type of electric utility is released. When winning, the second type support winning flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5112. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5110 that the result of lottery opening lottery is not a support winning (S5110: NO), the process proceeds to step S5112 without executing the process of step S5111.

  In step S5112, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a low probability mode. If it is determined in step S5112 that the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S5112: YES), the process proceeds to step S5113. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5112 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S5112: NO), the main role support processing is terminated as it is.

  In step S5113, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S5113 that the game number counter area is not “0” (S5113: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5113 that the game number counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S5114, and the high-frequency support flag is deleted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5115.

  In step S5115, the low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. Thereafter, the electronic role support process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5107 that the opening / closing execution mode is selected (S5107: YES), or if it is determined in step S5118 that it is not the high-frequency support mode (S5108: NO), the process proceeds to step S5116, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, the value stored in the power combination holding area 64c is shifted, and the value of the lottery execution area is collated with the low-frequency support mode electric-power-item release lottery table. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the electrified product opening lottery during the high frequency support mode is set to 10%, and the ratio allocated to the third type electrified opening is set to 100%. Specifically, since the value that the electric accessory release counter C4 can take is 0 to 249, when the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 24, It is elected for opening three kinds of electric roles. In addition, after the electrification opening lottery is executed, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5117.

  In step S5117, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric component release lottery in step S5116 is a win for the electric combination release (support win). In step S5117, if it is determined that the support is not won (S5117: NO), the main role support process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5117 that the support win is selected (S5117: YES), the process proceeds to step S5118, the support win flag is stored, and “2” is set in the second round counter area RC2. The processing for the main role support is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is stored (S5102: YES), the process proceeds to step S5119, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. If it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S5119: NO), since the symbol in the normal unit 38 is being displayed in a variable manner, the main character support process is continued. Exit. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S5119: YES), the process proceeds to step S5120.

  In step S5120, a winning display corresponding to the elected type of opening of the role is set. As a result, the symbol variation display in the normal symbol unit 38 is terminated, and the symbol corresponding to the type of winning display is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5121.

  In step S5121, the waiting time for opening corresponding to the elected type of opening of the electric role is set. Specifically, when the first type power combination is elected, “25” (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the release waiting time timer counter area Tw, and the second type power service release or the third type power service is set. When the opening is won, “125” (that is, 0.25 sec) is set in the opening waiting time timer counter area Tw. The opening waiting time timer counter area Tw is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5122, where the supporting flag is stored and the support winning flag is deleted. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5101 that the supporting flag is stored (S5101: YES), the process proceeds to step S5123, in which it is determined whether the open standby time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is “0”. If it is determined in step S5123 that the value of the opening standby time timer counter area Tw is “0” (S5123: YES), the process proceeds to step S5124 to control opening / closing of the opening / closing door 208b as an electric accessory. Executes the electric role opening / closing process. Details of the electric utility opening / closing process will be described later. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5123 that the value of the opening waiting time timer counter area Tw is not “0” (S5123: NO), the main role support process is terminated without executing the main role opening / closing process. To do.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the electric utility opening / closing process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is that when the winning combination is won during the high frequency support mode, the winning winning combination Regardless of the type of opening, the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, and the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to 0.2 seconds in the case of electrification opening during the low frequency support mode. It is a point to set. This will be specifically described below.

  In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the open / close door 208b as the electric accessory is being opened. Whether or not the open / close door 208b is open is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the opening / closing door 208b is opened (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202.

  In step S5202, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration time of the open / close door 208b. If it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S5202: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. That is, when the opening continuation time of the opening / closing door 208b has not ended, the main utility opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S5202: YES), the process proceeds to step S5203, and a closing process for controlling the open / close door 208b to a closed state is performed. 2. Set "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) in the timer counter area T2. It should be noted that the value of the second timer counter area T2 set in step S5203 is the same as the value of the opening / closing door 208b when the opening / closing door 208b serving as the electric accessory opens a plurality of times in one winning of the electric accessory opening lottery. This means the length of time (interval) from the closing to the next opening, and is the final transition from the open state of the open / close door 208b to the closed state triggered by one winning of the electric character opening lottery. In this case, it means the length of time to wait after the opening / closing door 208b is closed and before the next electric accessory opening lottery is executed. After executing Step S5203, the process proceeds to Step S5204.

  In step S5204, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S5205, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S5205: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S5205: YES), the process proceeds to step S5206 and the supporting flag is deleted. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S5201 that the open / close door 208b is not open (S5201: NO), the process proceeds to step S5207, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the open / close door 208b. If it is determined in step S5207 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5207: NO), the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5207 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S5207: YES), the process proceeds to step S5208, and an opening process for controlling the open / close door 208b to an open state is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5209.

  In step S5209, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is determined that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode (S5209: NO), the process proceeds to step S5210, and whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. Determine.

  If it is determined in step S5210 that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S5210: YES), the process proceeds to step S5211, and “400” (that is, 0.8 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5210 that the high-frequency support mode is not in effect (S5210: NO), and if it is determined in step S5209 that the open / close execution mode is in effect (S5209: YES), the process proceeds to step S5212. Then, “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the same effect as that of the above-described eighth embodiment is achieved, and the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 by changing the opening waiting time of the open / close door 208b. It is possible to change the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a in the first 1.2 seconds (FIGS. 87 and 89). Therefore, inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), if the length of the opening standby time is changed, Since the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a can be changed, the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 is set to the same length (0.05 seconds in the present embodiment) during the high frequency support mode, the open / close door 208b. By setting the waiting time for opening a plurality of types (in this embodiment, 0.05 seconds and 0.25 seconds), the open / close door 208b is opened from the closed state after the game ball passes through the through gate 206. The time until the transition to the state is started (the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 + the waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to a plurality of types of lengths. That is, according to the present embodiment, the time until the opening / closing door 208b starts the transition from the closed state to the open state after the result of the electric utility opening lottery is displayed by the normal unit 38 (opening of the opening / closing door 208b). By changing the waiting time, the time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the opening / closing door 208b starts to transition from the closed state to the open state (variable time of the normal unit 38 + opening / closing door 208b) The waiting time for opening) and the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a can be changed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the main controller 60 determines whether the game ball GB1 is opened or closed after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 during the high frequency support mode. A time shorter than the time required to reach the ball device 208 is set. Therefore, the normal unit 38 passes the through gate 206 and displays the result of the electric player opening lottery before the timing at which the game ball GB1 triggered by the electric player releasing lottery reaches the opening and closing device 208. It is possible to display. As a result, the main control device 60 has the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 and has become an opportunity for the electric player opening lottery after the result of the electric player releasing lottery is displayed by the universal unit 38. It is possible to execute a control to start a transition from the closed state of the open / close door 208b to the open state (control in the case where the first type electrification opening is won) before the timing at which the open / close ball entering device 208 is reached. Become. Therefore, the game ball GB1 that triggered the transition of the open / close door 208b to the open state (the game ball GB1 that passed the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery to open the electric game object) enters the second start opening 208a. Control can be executed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the first type electrification opening is won (FIGS. 86 and 87), the main controller 60 sets the opening waiting time of the open / close door 208b to 0.05 seconds. At the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the opening and closing device 208, the open / close door 208b is in an open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second start opening 208a. On the other hand, in the case of winning the second-type power combination opening (FIGS. 88 and 89), the main control device 60 sets the opening waiting time of the open / close door 208b to 0.25 seconds, and thus has passed through the through gate 206. At the timing when the game ball GB1 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208, the open / close door 208b has not yet changed to the open state, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second start opening 208a. In other words, according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a can be changed by changing the waiting time for opening, so that an inflection can be added to the game, It is possible to improve interest.

  In the present embodiment, the opening standby time of the opening / closing door 208b is set based on the type won in the electric component opening lottery during the high frequency support mode. However, the opening / closing door is based on other factors. It is good also as a structure which sets the open waiting time of 208b. For example, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of support modes can be executed, the opening waiting time of the door 208b may be set to a different length for each type of support mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which sets the opening waiting time of the opening-and-closing door 208b to different length for every kind of lottery mode (low probability mode and high probability mode) of lottery lottery. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which comprises the random number counter for setting an opening waiting time, and sets the opening waiting time of the opening-and-closing door 208b based on the value of the acquired random number counter. In addition, when the jackpot lottery is won, the opening / closing waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b is determined based on the type won for the jackpot lottery in a predetermined number of game times after the opening / closing execution mode is terminated with the winning as a trigger. It is good also as a structure which sets.

  In the present embodiment, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is changed by changing the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b. However, the variation time of the normal unit 38 is changed. By doing so, the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a may be changed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes the number of the game balls which enter into the 2nd starting port 208a by changing both the fluctuation | variation time of the usual figure unit 38, and the open standby time of the opening-and-closing door 208b. In addition, the number of game balls entering the second starting port 208a is changed by changing the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in addition to the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b and the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. It is good.

  In addition, the configuration in which the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a is changed by changing the waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b is the second start opening unit 300, 300B to the ninth embodiment described above. You may apply with respect to 300F (FIG. 78, FIG. 84, FIG. 85).

K. Eleventh embodiment:
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second starter port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the tenth embodiment. The difference from the tenth embodiment is that the mode for controlling the open / close door 208b is different. Below, the aspect of control of the door 208b is mainly demonstrated. The description of the same configuration and processing as those in the tenth embodiment is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, three types of high frequency support modes are set, and the type of winning in the case of winning the electrification opening lottery during the high frequency support mode is set to one type (first type electric utility opening). Has been. In addition, one type of winning combination (second-type electric combination opening) is set when the electric component opening lottery is won during the low frequency support mode. The details of the control time of the open / close door 208b for each type of variation of the usual figure unit 38 and the winning type of the electrification opening lottery are as follows.

・ Electrical character opening lottery during the first high-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the regular drawing unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning the prize, the percentage that is distributed to the first-class power release: 100%
-When elected to open the first class electric role Opening waiting time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.95 seconds Opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: once Opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Lottery for opening the electric parts during the second high-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the usual figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning the prize, the percentage that is distributed to the first-class power release: 100%
-When elected to open the first class electric role Opening waiting time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: once Opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Lottery for opening the electric parts during the 3rd high-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the regular figure unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning the prize, the percentage that is distributed to the first-class power release: 100%
-When elected to open the first class electric role Opening and closing door 208b waiting time: 0.05 seconds Opening and closing door 208b opening times: 1 time Opening and closing door 208b opening time: 0.8 seconds

・ Lottery for opening an electric accessory during the low-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the regular drawing unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning the prize, the percentage allocated to the second-class power release: 100%
-When elected to open the second class electric role Opening and closing door 208b waiting time: 0.35 seconds Opening and closing door 208b opening times: 1 time Opening and closing door 208b opening time: 0.2 seconds

  In the above-described control mode of the door 208b, the difference between the three high-frequency support modes is the time from when the fluctuation display of the general map unit 38 stops until the door 208b starts to transition to the open state. The length of the waiting time for release, and as will be described later, in the situation where game balls are continuously being fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the game balls entering the second start opening 208a The number is different. The time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds which is the firing interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game. The time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

  FIG. 93 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing entrance device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the first high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 93, the game ball is 0.6 at a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starter unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the fluctuation display of the normal unit 38 starts. . When 0.05 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the usual unit 38 and 0.95 seconds which are the waiting time for opening elapse, the open / close door 208b transitions to the opened state and maintains the opened state for 0.8 seconds.

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed open / close door 208b for 0.10 seconds until the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state. Then, the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, and at the timing when it reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state. To do. Note that at the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the open / close door 208b is in an open state, so that the fluctuation display of the normal unit 38 is not started and is suspended.

  And when 0.8 second passes and the opening-and-closing door 208b changes to a closed state, the fluctuation | variation display of the normally-fed unit 38 will be started. As can be understood from FIG. 93, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening and closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation display of the normal unit 38 starts. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 arrives at the opening and closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation display of the general chart unit 38 starts. Therefore, the relationship that only the game ball GB3 enters the second start port 208a among the game balls GB1 to GB3 continues even after the game ball GB4. The first high frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above is summarized as follows. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second start opening 208a is set to two.

・ First high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/3 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered × Number of prize balls: 1 × 2 = 2 = 2 Increase / decrease in game balls: 3 The number of game balls is decreased by 1 in 1.8 seconds when one game ball is launched. Rate of launch: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 2 pieces / 3 pieces = 0.67

  FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing entrance device 208, and also shows the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the second high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the game ball is 0.6 at a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the fluctuation display of the normal unit 38 starts. . When 0.05 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the usual unit 38, and 0.25 seconds, which is the open standby time, have elapsed, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

  The first game ball GB1 passes through the open / close door 208b in the closed state for 0.30 seconds until the open / close door 208b changes to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second start opening 208a because the open / close door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when it reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208. The behavior of the third and subsequent game balls is a repetition of the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2, and will not be described. The above-described second high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment is summarized as follows.

-Second high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 1/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered × Number of prize balls: 1 × 2 = 2 = 2 Increase / decrease in game balls: Increase / decrease None Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 2 = 2/2 = 2.

  FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing entrance device 208 and the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the third high-frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the game ball is 0.6 at a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starter unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 95, in the third high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the fluctuation display of the normal unit 38 starts. . When 0.05 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38, and 0.05 seconds, which is the waiting time for opening, elapse, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second start opening 208a because the open / close door 208b is in the open state at the timing when they reach the opening and closing device 208. The behavior of the third and subsequent game balls is a repetition of the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2, and will not be described. The above-described third high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment is summarized as follows.

・ Third high frequency support mode:
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered × Number of prize balls: 2 × 2 = 4 Increase / decrease of game balls: 2 The number of game balls is increased by 2 in 1.2 seconds when one game ball is fired. Ball-out rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 4/2 pieces = 2.00

  FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing entrance device 208 and the control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the low frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the game ball is 0.6 at a constant firing strength that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the low frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the fluctuation display of the normal unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds which is the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 and 0.35 seconds which are the open standby time have elapsed, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state with a probability of 10%, and the open state is changed to 0.2. Hold for seconds. Below, the case where it is elected to the 2nd kind electric power opening with a probability of 10% is explained.

  The first game ball GB1 passes through the closed open / close door 208b for 0.40 seconds until the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state. Since the opening / closing door 208b has already shifted to the closed state when the second game ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208, the opening / closing door in the closed state does not enter the second start opening 208a. Pass 208b. The behavior of the third and subsequent game balls is a repetition of the behavior of the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2, and will not be described. The low frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above is summarized as follows.

・ Infrequent support mode:
Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 0/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of winning balls: 0 × 2 = 0 = 0 increase / decrease of game balls: 2 The number of game balls is reduced by 2 in 1.2 seconds when one game ball is fired. Rate of play: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 0 = 0/2 pieces = 0

  FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a sorting table in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 97, for reference, the types and contents of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode are also described. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the type of the high frequency support mode executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the first high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode, and the third high frequency support mode are provided. Is set.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting port 33 is won and the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 15, The result is a 4R normal jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and also shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends. 3 Shift to the high frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 8R probability variation jackpot, and the second after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Transition to high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), when the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 208a is won and the acquired value of the jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, The result is a 4R normal jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and also shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 4R normal jackpot, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends. 3 Shift to the high frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the distribution result is 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the second after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Transition to high frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the distribution result is 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R probability variation jackpot, and the second after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Transition to high frequency support mode.

  Note that the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended when a predetermined number of game times (100 in this embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Transition to low frequency support mode. In addition, the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot continues without ending until the next jackpot lottery is won. Further, the high probability mode that shifts after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot continues without ending until the next jackpot lottery is won.

  In addition, the first total pitch rate T1 and the second total pitch rate T2 in the present embodiment are as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2 + M3 × PA3
= 0.67 × (16/30) + 1.00 × (10/30) + 2.00 × (4/30) = 0.96
T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2 + M3 × PB3
= 0.67 × (6/30) + 1.00 × (18/30) + 2.00 × (6/30) = 0.83

  Thus, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total pitch rate T1 and the value of the second total pitch rate T2 are less than 1. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the waiting time for opening, the first high-frequency support mode in which the start rate is less than 1 and the second high-frequency support in which the start rate is 1 Since it is possible to execute the mode and the third high-frequency support mode in which the turn-out rate exceeds 1, it is possible to add inflection to the game and improve the interest of the game. In addition, according to the present embodiment, even if the time for which the open / close door 208b is kept open is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), the length of the waiting time for opening is set. If changed, the three high-frequency support modes described above can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first high-frequency support with a ball exit rate of less than 1 is achieved by the second starter unit 200 (FIG. 70), which has a simple configuration using only one alternating distribution mechanism 204. It is possible to execute the mode, the second high-frequency support mode in which the ball-out rate is 1, and the third high-frequency support mode in which the ball-out rate exceeds 1. That is, in order to execute the three high-frequency support modes as compared with the configuration in which the three high-frequency support modes are executed by the second starter unit 300 (FIG. 78) including the two alternating distribution mechanisms 304 and 305. Since this mechanism can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, for example, by arranging other objects in the vacant game area.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery becomes 4R normal jackpot A, the high probability mode is not started, but the first high-frequency support mode is started. When the first high-frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entrance part is promoted, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the ball-out rate in the first high-frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first high-frequency support mode is ended when the number of executions of the big hit lottery reaches the specified number (100 times) without the big hit lottery result being a big hit. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the jackpot lottery will be a big hit before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times and the first high-frequency support mode ends. Also, in order to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand, the player plays the game with the expectation that it will be a big win in the early big win lottery as much as possible.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery becomes an 8R probability variable jackpot, the high probability mode is started and the second high-frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot improves. In addition, when the second high-frequency support mode is started, the game balls are entered into the ball-entry unit, so that the big hit lottery is promoted. Further, since the ball-out rate in the second high-frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. The high probability mode continues at least until the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot (various jackpots). In addition, the second high-frequency support mode continues until the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot (various jackpots). Therefore, the player expects that the high probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode will continue until the big win in the jackpot lottery, so that the result of the jackpot lottery will be the 8R probability variable jackpot and the high probability mode will continue. While playing games. In addition, the player can concentrate his / her feelings on the type of result in the case where the result of the big win lottery becomes a big hit because the number of game balls on hand does not increase or decrease.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is a 4R normal jackpot, the high probability mode is not started, but the third high-frequency support mode is started. When the third high-frequency support mode is started, a game ball is entered into the ball-entry unit, so that the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Furthermore, since the ball-out rate in the third high-frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The third high-frequency support mode is ended when the number of executions of the big hit lottery reaches the specified number (100 times) without the big hit lottery result being a big hit. Therefore, the player continues the third high-frequency support mode until the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls on hand, but before the third high-frequency support mode ends. Until then, the game will be played with the expectation that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. And even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not become a big hit before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number (100 times), the player has the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. Satisfaction that lasted the longest period can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create a new gameability that effectively uses the three control modes to give the player various expectations, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Can be planned. Moreover, according to this embodiment, even if it is the same 4R normal jackpot, it is possible to add inflection to the game by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery reaches reach, a longer variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 than when the result of the jackpot lottery is lost. The In the period when the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, the greater the number of times that the jackpot lottery results reach, that is, the greater the number of times that the long variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37, The time required for the number of executions of the big hit lottery (game times) to reach the prescribed number of 100 times becomes longer. As a result, since the period during which the third high-frequency support is continued also increases, the period during which the player's hand-held game balls increase also increases. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, a new gameability is created in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times that the result of jackpot lottery is reached. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As another embodiment, a longer time may be set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 as the number of jackpot lotteries executed after the third high-frequency support mode is started increases. According to this structure, the variation time of the special figure unit 37 that is set increases as the number of executions of the jackpot lottery approaches the prescribed number of 100 times, so the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases continues. The period to do becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a feeling of frustration of the player that the jackpot lottery is not won even though the number of lottery lottery executions is close to 100.

  As another embodiment, the high-frequency support mode in which the opening standby time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high-frequency support mode may be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode having a lower turnout rate than the first high-frequency support mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes are executed by setting the opening standby time to a plurality of lengths. However, as another embodiment, the variable time of the general map unit 38 is set to a plurality of times. It is good also as a structure which performs multiple types of high frequency support mode by setting to length of.

L. Twelfth embodiment:
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second start port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the eleventh embodiment. The difference from the eleventh embodiment is that the high probability mode ends when a predetermined number of game times (100 times in this embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery (so-called special time). And the contents of the distribution table are different. Hereinafter, differences from the eleventh embodiment will be mainly described. The description of the same configuration and processing as those in the eleventh embodiment is omitted.

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a sorting table in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment. In FIG. 98, for reference, the types and contents of the high-frequency support mode executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode are also described.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 is won and the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 15, The result is a 4R normal jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and also shifts to the first high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends. 3 Shift to the high frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is 8R probability variation jackpot, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 8R probability variation jackpot, and the second after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Transition to high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting port 208a is won and the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 17, The result is a 10R probability variation jackpot A, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the mode shifts to the first high-frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 18 to 26, the distribution result is 10R probability variation jackpot B, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 10R probability variation jackpot, and after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, 2 Move to the high frequency support mode. Further, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 27 to 29, the distribution result is 10R probability variation jackpot C, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 10R probability variation jackpot, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends. 3 Shift to the high frequency support mode.

  Note that the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended when a predetermined number of game times (100 in this embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Transition to low frequency support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, even in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a predetermined number of game times (100 in this embodiment) without winning the jackpot lottery Is terminated, and the low-frequency support mode is entered. Further, the high probability mode that shifts after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is also terminated when a predetermined number of game times (100 in the present embodiment) are executed without winning the jackpot lottery.

  In addition, the first total pitch rate T1 and the second total pitch rate T2 in the present embodiment are as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2 + M3 × PA3
= 0.67 × (16/30) + 1.00 × (10/30) + 2.00 × (4/30) = 0.96
T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2 + M3 × PB3
= 0.67 × (18/30) + 1.00 × (9/30) + 2.00 × (3/30) = 0.90

  Thus, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total pitch rate T1 and the value of the second total pitch rate T2 are less than 1. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the total number of game balls held by the player does not increase but decreases.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery result is 10R probability variable jackpot A, the high probability mode is started and the first high-frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot improves. In addition, when the first high-frequency support mode is started, the game balls enter the second start opening 208a are promoted, so that the execution of the big hit lottery is promoted. However, since the ball-out rate in the first high-frequency support mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The high-probability mode and the first high-frequency support mode are terminated when the number of jackpot lottery executions reaches the specified number (100 times) without the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win a jackpot lottery as early as possible before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times and the high probability mode ends. Furthermore, the player plays the game while expecting to win a big jackpot in an earlier jackpot lottery in order to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery becomes 10R probability variable jackpot B, the high probability mode is started and the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot improves. In addition, when the second high-frequency support mode is started, the game ball entering the second start port 208a is promoted, so that the execution of the big hit lottery is promoted. In addition, since the ball-out rate in the second high-frequency support mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. The high-probability mode and the second high-frequency support mode are terminated when the number of jackpot lottery executions reaches the specified number (100 times) without the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win a jackpot lottery as early as possible before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number of times and the high probability mode ends.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery becomes the 10R probability variable jackpot C, the high probability mode is started and the third high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot improves. In addition, when the third high-frequency support mode is started, the game balls are entered into the second start opening 208a, so that the big hit lottery is promoted. Furthermore, since the ball-out rate in the third high-frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The high probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are terminated when the number of jackpot lottery executions reaches the specified number (100 times) without the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot. Therefore, the player continues the third high-frequency support mode until the number of jackpot lottery executions reaches the specified number of times to increase the number of game balls on hand, but the number of jackpot lottery executions reaches the specified number of times and increases. The game is played while expecting that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a big hit before the probability mode and the third high-frequency support mode are finished. And even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not become a big hit before the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches the specified number (100 times), the player has the third high-frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases. Satisfaction that lasted the longest period can be obtained.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create a new gameability that gives the player various expectations during the period in which the high probability mode limited to the specified number of times is being executed. It is possible to improve interest. Moreover, according to this embodiment, even if it is the same 10R probability variation jackpot, it is possible to add inflection to the game by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery reaches reach, a longer variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 than when the result of the jackpot lottery is lost. The In the period when the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, the greater the number of times that the jackpot lottery results reach, that is, the greater the number of times that the long variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37, The time required for the number of executions of the big hit lottery (game times) to reach the prescribed number of 100 times becomes longer. As a result, since the period during which the third high-frequency support is continued also increases, the period during which the player's hand-held game balls increase also increases. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the period in which the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, a new gameability is created in which the number of game balls increases as the number of times that the result of jackpot lottery is reached. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As another embodiment, a longer time may be set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 as the number of jackpot lotteries executed after the third high-frequency support mode is started increases. According to this structure, the variation time of the special figure unit 37 that is set increases as the number of executions of the jackpot lottery approaches the prescribed number of 100 times, so the third high frequency support mode in which the number of game balls increases continues. The period to do becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a feeling of frustration of the player that the jackpot lottery is not won even though the number of lottery lottery executions is close to 100.

  As another embodiment, the high-frequency support mode in which the opening standby time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high-frequency support mode may be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode having a lower turnout rate than the first high-frequency support mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes are executed by setting the opening standby time to a plurality of lengths. However, as another embodiment, the variable time of the general map unit 38 is set to a plurality of times. It is good also as a structure which performs multiple types of high frequency support mode by setting to length of.

M.M. Thirteenth embodiment:
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described. The present embodiment includes the same second start port unit 200 (FIG. 70) as the twelfth embodiment. The difference from the twelfth embodiment is that the mode for controlling the open / close door 208b is different. Below, the aspect of control of the door 208b is mainly demonstrated. The description of the same configuration and processing as those in the twelfth embodiment is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, one type of high-frequency support mode is set, and the type of winning in the case of winning the electrification opening lottery during the high-frequency support mode is set to one type (first type electric utility release). Has been. Then, three types (0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, 0.05 seconds) of fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 set during the high frequency support mode are prepared. In addition, one type of winning combination (second-type electric combination opening) is set when the electric component opening lottery is won during the low frequency support mode. The details of the control time of the open / close door 208b for each type of variation of the usual figure unit 38 and the winning type of the electrification opening lottery are as follows.

-Opening lottery for electric equipment during high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of ordinary figure unit 38: 0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, or 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning the prize, the percentage that is distributed to the first-class power release: 100%
-When elected to open the first class electric role Opening waiting time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.95 seconds Opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: once Opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

・ Lottery for opening an electric accessory during the low-frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the regular drawing unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning the prize, the percentage allocated to the second-class power release: 100%
-When elected to open the second class electric role Opening and closing door 208b waiting time: 0.35 seconds Opening and closing door 208b opening times: 1 time Opening and closing door 208b opening time: 0.2 seconds

  In the present embodiment, the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the game ball launching mechanism 81 due to the difference in the length of the fluctuation time of the usual figure unit 38 set during the high frequency support mode. In this situation, the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a is different. This will be specifically described below. The time of 0.8 seconds set as the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b is longer than 0.6 seconds which is the firing interval between the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game. The time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, which is the firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

  FIG. 99 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing entrance device 208, and the opening / closing door when the fluctuation time of the general unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds during the high-frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 99, the game ball is 0.6 at a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starting port unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the high-frequency support mode of this embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the fluctuation display of the general-purpose unit 38 starts. When 0.95 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the open standby time have elapsed, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. .

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the closed open / close door 208b for 0.10 seconds until the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state. Then, the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, and at the timing when it reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208, the opening / closing door 208b transitions to the open state. To do. Note that at the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, the open / close door 208b is in an open state, so that the fluctuation display of the normal unit 38 is not started and is suspended.

  And when 0.8 second passes and the opening-and-closing door 208b changes to a closed state, the fluctuation | variation display of the normally-fed unit 38 will be started. As can be understood from FIG. 99, the fourth game ball GB4 arrives at the opening / closing entrance device 208 after 0.2 seconds from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal unit 38. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first game ball GB1 arrives at the opening and closing ball entry device 208 0.2 seconds after the fluctuation display of the general chart unit 38 starts. Therefore, when the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 is continuously set to 0.95 seconds, only the game ball GB3 out of the game balls GB1 to GB3 enters the second start opening 208a. The relationship will continue even after game ball GB4.

  A summary of the case where the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds during the high-frequency support mode described above is as follows. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second start opening 208a is set to two.

-High frequency support mode (variation time of ordinary unit 38 = 0.95 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 1/3 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered × Number of prize balls: 1 × 2 = 2 = 2 Increase / decrease in game balls: 3 The number of game balls is decreased by 1 in 1.8 seconds when one game ball is launched. Rate of launch: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 2 pieces / 3 pieces = 0.67

  FIG. 100 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing entrance device 208, and the opening / closing door when the fluctuation time of the general unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds during the high-frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 100, the game ball is 0.6 at a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starter unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in the high-frequency support mode of this embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the fluctuation display of the general-purpose unit 38 starts. When 0.25 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the open standby time have elapsed, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. .

  The first game ball GB1 passes through the open / close door 208b in the closed state for 0.30 seconds until the open / close door 208b changes to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second start opening 208a because the open / close door 208b has transitioned to the open state at the timing when it reaches the opening / closing entrance device 208. Regarding the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, when the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 is continuously set to 0.25 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 are used. Since the above behavior is repeated, the description thereof is omitted.

  The following is a summary of the case where the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds during the high-frequency support mode described above.

-High frequency support mode (variation time of ordinary unit 38 = 0.25 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls launched: 1/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered × Number of prize balls: 1 × 2 = 2 = 2 Increase / decrease in game balls: Increase / decrease None Launch rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / Number of game balls fired = 2 = 2/2 = 2.

  FIG. 101 shows the timing at which the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing ball-injecting device 208, and when the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds during the third high-frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 101, the game ball is 0.6 at a constant firing intensity that can reach the second starter unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 by the game ball launch mechanism 81. Fired continuously at intervals of seconds. Therefore, the game ball enters the opening 202 of the second starting port unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls that have entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. The behavior when game balls are distributed is the same as in FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of game balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the fluctuation display of the general-purpose unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the open standby time have elapsed, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds. .

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second start opening 208a because the open / close door 208b is in the open state at the timing when they reach the opening and closing device 208. As for the behavior of the third and subsequent game balls, when the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 is continuously set to 0.05 seconds, the first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 are used. Since the above behavior is repeated, the description thereof is omitted.

  The following is a summary of the case where the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds during the high-frequency support mode described above.

・ High-frequency support mode (variation time of ordinary unit 38 = 0.05 seconds):
Number of game balls entered / Number of game balls fired: 2/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = Number of game balls entered × Number of prize balls: 2 × 2 = 4 Increase / decrease of game balls: 2 The number of game balls is increased by 2 in 1.2 seconds when one game ball is fired. Ball-out rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls fired = 4/2 pieces = 2.00

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the pitching rate in the high frequency support mode by changing the fluctuation time of the universal map unit 38 in the high frequency support mode. That is, it is possible to increase, maintain, or decrease the number of game balls held by the player by changing the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 during the high frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, when a normal jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. And if you win the jackpot lottery after the transition to the high-frequency support mode or if the number of executions of the jackpot lottery reaches 100 times without winning the jackpot lottery after the transition to the high-frequency support mode, The high frequency support mode ends.

  In the present embodiment, the period after winning the normal jackpot and shifting to the high-frequency support mode until the high-frequency support mode ends is determined by referring to the variable time table for the high-frequency support mode. The fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 and the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38 are set. However, even if it is a period that refers to the variable time table for the high frequency support mode, when setting the game time variable time that will win the big hit lottery or setting the game time variable time that will reach In this case, the fluctuation time of the special figure unit 37 is set by referring to the big hit fluctuation time table and the reach generation fluctuation time table.

  FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram of a variation time table for the high frequency support mode. FIG. 102A shows a variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 102B shows a variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode.

  In this embodiment, when shifting to the high frequency support mode, the variable time of the special figure unit 37 and the variable time of the general map unit 38 are set by referring to the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of the big hit lottery, the big hit is set, and when winning a big hit during the high frequency support mode, the table to be referred to is a variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode, and Switch between the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode. Note that “small winning” is a lottery result that is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode but the support mode and the lottery mode are not changed.

  As shown in FIG. 102A, the variable time table set A for the high-frequency support mode is composed of a special figure unit table A and a universal unit table A.

  In the special figure unit table A, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the variation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored in association with each other. In the present embodiment, 1.0 second is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 1.6 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 2.2 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37.

  In the general chart unit table A, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the general chart unit 38 are stored in association with each other. In FIG. 102A, for reference, increase / decrease of game balls when the variation time is set, and game balls enter the second start opening 208a when the variation time is set. The interval is shown.

  In the present embodiment, during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times, 0.05 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal unit 38. Accordingly, during this period, game balls enter the second start opening 208a at a rate of one per 0.6 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player increases. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 0.25 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38. Accordingly, during this period, a game ball enters the second starting port 208a at a rate of one per 1.2 seconds, and the player's hand-held game ball does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal figure unit 38. Therefore, during this period, game balls enter the second start opening 208a at a rate of one per 1.8 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player decreases.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (B), the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode includes a special figure unit table B and a universal unit table B.

  In the special figure unit table B, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the variation time of the special figure unit 37 are stored in correspondence. In the present embodiment, 2.2 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, 1.6 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 1.0 seconds is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37.

  In the usual figure unit table B, the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode and the variation time of the ordinary figure unit 38 are stored in association with each other. In FIG. 102B, for reference, the increase or decrease of game balls when the variation time is set, and the game balls enter the second start opening 208a when the variation time is set. The interval is shown.

  In the present embodiment, 0.95 seconds are set as the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Therefore, during this period, game balls enter the second start opening 208a at a rate of one per 1.8 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player decreases. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 0.25 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38. Accordingly, during this period, a game ball enters the second starting port 208a at a rate of one per 1.2 seconds, and the player's hand-held game ball does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 0.05 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal unit 38. Accordingly, during this period, game balls enter the second start opening 208a at a rate of one per 0.6 seconds, and the number of game balls held by the player increases.

  FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing increase / decrease in the number of game balls held by the player during the high-frequency support mode. FIG. 103 (A) shows an example of increase / decrease of game balls when the variation time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, and FIG. 103 (B) shows the variation time table for the high frequency support mode. An example of increase / decrease of game balls when set B is selected is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, a period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times During this time, the number of game balls held by the player increases. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period when the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (A), the number of game balls held by the player at the time when 100 game rounds have ended is greater than that at the start of the high-frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (B), when the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, a period in which the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times During this time, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. During the period when the number of game times after shifting to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70 times, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after the transition to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, the number of game balls held by the player increases. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (B), the number of game balls held by the player at the time when 100 game rounds have ended is greater than that at the start of the high frequency support mode.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the shorter the variation time of the special figure unit 37 is, the more the period during which the game ball enters the second starting port 208a during the high frequency support mode is larger. It is set (FIG. 102). Therefore, it is possible to quickly digest the jackpot lottery held by the game ball entering the second starting port 208a during the fluctuation of the special figure unit 37.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the high frequency support mode is set to a variation time longer than the interval between game balls entering the second starting port 208a (FIG. 102). . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of the rhythm feeling of the jackpot lottery during the high-frequency support mode due to the interruption of the jackpot lottery suspension.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot lottery, if the winning of the jackpot or reach is won, a long variation time (for example, 30 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37. If a long variation time is set as the variation time of the special figure unit 37 during the period in which the game balls increase in the high frequency support mode, the period in which the game balls increase increases. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to win as many reach as possible during the period when the game balls increase. That is, according to the present embodiment, a new value can be added to reach generation.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, and during the period when the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, The number of game balls held by the person decreases. If the small win is won during this period and the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, the number of game balls held by the player will increase again. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the table will be changed by winning a small hit during the period when the game balls are decreasing. That is, according to the present embodiment, a new sense of expectation can be provided to the player during the high frequency support mode, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, two types of variable time table sets A and B are stored. However, there may be one type of variable time table set, or three or more types. Also good.

  As another embodiment, only the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 may be set with reference to the general unit table A or the general unit table B during the high frequency support mode. Also with this configuration, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of game balls held by the player during the high-frequency support mode, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

N. Variations:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist thereof. For example, the following modifications are possible.

N1. Modification 1:
In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores the contents of the game effects executed in the latest game times or the contents of the effect elements constituting the game effects regardless of the presence / absence of the hold information, and executes the previous visual notice. In this case, the stored game effect or the content of the effect element constituting the game effect may be executed in the next game round. With such a configuration, even if there is a new winning in a state where there is no holding information, the gaming effect or gaming effect executed in the previous gaming round is configured in the gaming round related to the winning. Since the effect elements to be executed are executed, the game effects having the same contents or the effect elements constituting the game effects can be executed a plurality of times, and the player can be given a visual feeling.

N2. Modification 2:
In the above embodiment, when an effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, an effect element to be executed next may be started at the same time as the effect element to be executed first ends. In this way, it is possible to give the player a stronger visual sensation.

N3. Modification 3:
In the above embodiment, after the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, the suggestion effect suggesting that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times is executed. However, before the same content effect element is executed a plurality of times, a prior suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the same content effect element is executed a plurality of times may be performed. . In this way, the player who has recognized the prior suggestion effect can have a strong interest in the effect element executed thereafter. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game effect, and to improve the interest.

N4. Modification 4:
In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the opening / closing doors 208b and 308b have different time lengths for maintaining the open state for each type of the high-frequency support mode. Instead, the high-frequency support mode is used. The number of times that the open / close doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state and the timing at which the open / close doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state may be different for each mode type. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the number of game balls entering the second starting port is different.

N5. Modification 5:
In the ninth embodiment, the main controller 60 is configured to be able to execute only one type of the third high-frequency support mode as the high-frequency support mode in which the turnout rate exceeds 1, but the main controller 60 A configuration in which a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes with a ball exit rate exceeding 1 may be executed.

  For example, in the ninth embodiment, the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the open / close door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds may be executed. In the fourth high-frequency support mode in which the opening time of the open / close door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds, the game ball can reach the second start port unit 300 by the game ball launch mechanism 81 with a predetermined launch intensity. In a situation where fires are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, all four game balls will enter the second start opening 308a, and eight game balls will be paid out as prize balls. become. Therefore, the exit rate when the fourth high-frequency support mode is executed is 2.00. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of exhilaration to be given to the player in the high frequency support mode in which the pitching rate exceeds 1. As a result, inflection can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, even if it is a case where it is a structure which can perform 4th high frequency support mode, by adjusting each ratio which performs 1st-4th high frequency support mode, the 1st comprehensive appearance rate mentioned above The values of T1 and the second overall pitching rate T2 can be less than 1.

N6. Modification 6:
In the ninth embodiment, among the four game balls, one game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R11, and the three game balls GB2, GB3, and GB4 that arrive after the game ball GB1 are the route R11. Although it is configured to distribute to different routes (route R2 and route R12), instead of this configuration, one game ball GB1 is distributed to a predetermined route, and two game balls arrived after the game ball GB1 The game path may be distributed to a path different from the predetermined path. One game ball GB1 may be distributed to the predetermined path, and four or more predetermined number of game balls that have arrived after the game ball GB1 may be allocated to the predetermined path. It is good also as a structure which distributes to a path | route different from this path | route. That is, it is possible to distribute one game ball GB1 to a predetermined route and distribute N game balls (N is an integer of 2 or more) reached after the game ball GB1 to a route different from the predetermined route. Good.

  In addition, instead of the through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment, a prize ball opening that allows a game ball to enter or a predetermined position can be reached at a position where only one game ball GB1 distributed to the predetermined route can be reached. It is good also as a structure which provides an accessory. According to such a configuration, of the (N + 1) game balls, only one game ball GB1 is made to reach the prize ball mouth or a predetermined accessory, and N game balls arrived after the game ball GB1. Can be prevented from reaching the prize ball opening or a predetermined accessory.

  Furthermore, at the time of designing the gaming machine, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to a route different from the predetermined route) to a desired value, a game that reaches a prize ball opening or a predetermined accessory The proportion of spheres can be set to a desired proportion. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved and the diversification of the game can be achieved.

N7. Modification 7:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, instead of the opening / closing doors 208b and 308b, the state of the second start ports 208a and 308a is set such that the game ball is difficult to enter and the game ball is easy to enter. Other mechanisms for transitioning between the two may be employed. For example, a so-called electric tulip may be adopted as another mechanism instead of the opening / closing doors 208b and 308b.

N8. Modification 8:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning in the electric-powered object opening lottery during the high-frequency support mode is set to other than 100%. For example, you may employ | adopt the structure by which the probability set to 99%, 60%, etc. is set to the electrification thing open lottery in high frequency support mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the ball exit rate in the high frequency support mode. For example, the probability of winning in the electric utility opening lottery is 100 with respect to the configuration in which the winning rate is 1 when the probability of winning in the electric appliance opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%. If it is set to less than%, it is possible to make the ball exit rate in the high-frequency support mode less than 1.

  In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball (the number of prize balls) when one game ball enters the second start opening 208a, 308a, You may set to arbitrary values other than two. In this way, it is possible to set the exit rate in the high frequency support mode to an arbitrary value. The number of game balls (number of prize balls) to be paid out as a prize ball when one game ball enters the second start opening 208a, 308a may be changed according to the game state. According to such a configuration, the game play rate of the high-frequency support mode changes according to the game state, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

N9. Modification 9:
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the type of the high-frequency support mode is set for each type of jackpot. However, the trigger for executing the high-frequency support mode and the type of the high-frequency support mode are determined. Any other configuration can be adopted as the configuration to be performed. For example, a configuration that executes the high frequency support mode when the number of consecutive game times that do not win the jackpot lottery exceeds a predetermined number, or the high frequency support mode according to the number of game times that do not win the jackpot lottery Configuration to determine the type of the system, whether or not to execute the high frequency support mode and a random number counter to determine the type, depending on the value of the acquired random number counter, whether to execute the high frequency support mode and high frequency support A configuration that determines the type of mode, a configuration that determines whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed and the type of the high-frequency support mode, depending on the type of stop symbol, and a high frequency when a specific reach effect is executed Configuration to execute support mode, configuration to determine the type of high frequency support mode according to the type of reach production to be performed, hold of the start The configuration in which the high frequency support mode is executed when the total number of game balls entered at the timing when the number reaches the upper limit exceeds the predetermined threshold, and the number of reserved openings at the start port becomes the upper limit For example, a configuration in which the type of the high-frequency support mode is determined according to the total number of game balls entered at a certain timing can be employed.

N10. Modification 10:
In the above-described eighth to twelfth embodiments, a configuration in which the starting rate and execution ratio in each high-frequency support mode are set so that the first total starting rate T1 and the second total starting rate T2 are less than 1. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the pitch rate and execution rate in each high-frequency support mode are set such that the first total pitch rate T1 and the second total pitch rate T2 are 1. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the player's euphoria.

N11. Modification 11:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right by generating a right, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, a part of the function realized by software may be realized by hardware, or a part of the function realized by hardware may be realized by software.

O. Regarding the invention group extracted from the above embodiments:
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof.

[Feature A1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subjected to the verification;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect element is determined,
In the production execution means,
From the game times prior to the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, start the execution of the determined effect element,
A gaming machine characterized in that the determined effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same contents until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed.

  According to the feature A1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. . The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Further, according to the feature A1, even if an effect that directly suggests that there is a high possibility that a privilege is given (for example, the pre-read lamp is lit red) is not performed, the effect element having the same content A game of paying attention to whether or not is executed a plurality of times can be realized. Therefore, the player can always play a game with a high expectation for the effect elements that are sequentially executed.

  Note that the game effect is executed by output from a plurality of hardware such as a speaker, a display device, a light emitting device, and a physically operating accessory provided in the gaming machine. The effect element means a combination of outputs at a predetermined timing by the plurality of hardwares that control the game effect. For example, one effect element (for example, a cut-in notice effect, a reach effect, or the like) is configured by outputting each of a speaker, a display device, and a light emitting device at a predetermined timing. A game effect is constituted by a plurality of effect elements.

  As described above, the effect element is a combination of outputs at a predetermined timing by a plurality of hardwares that control the game effect, and is configured by outputs at a predetermined timing from, for example, a speaker, a display device, and a light emitting device. If the content of the output at a predetermined timing from the display device and the light emitting device is the same as the effect element A from which the output from the speaker is deleted from the effect element A, the effect element having the same content is displayed. Will be included. When the effect element B is executed after the game machine has executed the effect element A, the game effect B does not include sound (output from the speaker) for the game effect A, but other hardware Since the contents of the output from the (display device and light emitting device) are the same, it is possible to give the player a visual sensation.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to feature A1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to feature A2, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of performance elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, or the expectation can be inflated. Can be changed.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A2,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied are completed. A game machine characterized in that the number of production elements of the contents of is increased with the passage of time.

  According to the feature A3, since the number of performance elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, further comprising:
Comprising an operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
The control means includes
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation.

  According to the feature A4, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Can surely give a visual sensation.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The control means provides the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect execution means after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine that is characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature A5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and changing the background image to a mode different from the normal time. A background change notice effect that causes a given character to perform a prescribed action, a lamp emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a prescribed pattern, a symbol sequence fluctuation effect that fluctuates a symbol string in a prescribed scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect for changing the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line, and a symbol stop effect for stopping a combination of predetermined symbols A gaming machine characterized by being included.

  According to the feature A6, since it is possible to give the player a visual sensation using various performance elements, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various performance elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof.

[Feature B1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
In a gaming machine comprising
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means may include at least one effect element until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. With the same content, let the production execution means execute multiple times,
Instructing the player to execute the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature B1, the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, so that the player can be given a visual feeling (dejab) that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. . The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given.

  Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Furthermore, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. It is possible to convince the player that this has a special meaning.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature B1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to feature B2, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of performance elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, or the expectation can be inflected. Can be changed.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B2,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied are completed. A game machine characterized in that the number of production elements of the contents of is increased with the passage of time.

  According to the feature B3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature B4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The determination means determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the verification. Is,
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means executes the plurality of times from the game times prior to the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect element that is an object to be played.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling from the game times prior to the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, and
Comprising an operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
The control means includes
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation.

  According to the feature B5, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Can surely give a visual sensation.

[Feature B6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and changing the background image to a mode different from the normal time. A background change notice effect that causes a given character to perform a prescribed action, a lamp emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a prescribed pattern, a symbol sequence fluctuation effect that fluctuates a symbol string in a prescribed scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect for changing the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line, and a symbol stop effect for stopping a combination of predetermined symbols A gaming machine characterized by being included.

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to give a player a visual sensation using various performance elements, so pay attention to the player whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in various performance elements. Can be made.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
Determining means for determining a display duration time required for one game round;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subjected to the verification;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
In a gaming machine comprising
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is at least two of a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. In each game time, the effect execution unit is caused to execute an effect element having the same content that can be executed within the shortest display duration of the display durations that can be determined by the determination unit. To play.

  According to the feature C1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player feels that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab). Can be given. The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  According to the feature C1, the control means causes the effect execution means to execute the effect element having the same contents that can be executed within the shortest display duration of the display continuation time that can be determined by the determination means. Even if the display duration times of the game times determined by the means are different, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute the effect elements having the same contents in each game time.

[Feature C2]
A gaming machine according to feature C1,
The control means includes
When the length of the display continuation time of one game time for executing the same content effect element is long enough to execute the same content effect element multiple times, it is the same in the one game time. A game machine characterized in that the effect execution means is caused to execute the effect execution means a plurality of times.

  According to the feature C2, it is possible to execute an effect element (hereinafter also referred to as an effect element for a visual notice notice) having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times. On the other hand, the existing visual feeling can be strongly recognized. In addition, since the number of executions of the visual sensation effect element is increased or decreased depending on the length of the display duration of one game time, it is possible to give an inflection to the player's expectation.

  Furthermore, since the presentation element for the visual notice notice is an effect element that can be executed within the shortest display duration among the display durations that can be determined by the determining means, the time required for one execution is 1 It is less than or equal to the display duration of the game times. Therefore, even if the visual effect notice element is executed once in one game time, a surplus time may occur in the display duration time. According to this gaming machine, when the display duration of one game time is a length that can execute an effect element for visual notice notice (an effect element having the same content) multiple times, Since the effect element having the same contents is executed a plurality of times in one game time, the surplus time of the display continuation time can be minimized.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to feature C3, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of performance elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and the expectation can be increased. Can be changed.

[Feature C4]
A gaming machine according to Feature C3,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied are completed. A game machine characterized in that the number of production elements of the contents of is increased with the passage of time.

  According to the feature C4, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, further comprising:
Comprising an operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
The control means includes
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation.

  According to the feature C5, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Can surely give a visual sensation.

[Feature C6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5,
The control means provides the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect execution means after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine that is characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature C6, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature C7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6,
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and changing the background image to a mode different from the normal time. A background change notice effect that causes a given character to perform a prescribed action, a lamp emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a prescribed pattern, a symbol sequence fluctuation effect that fluctuates a symbol string in a prescribed scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect for changing the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line, and a symbol stop effect for stopping a combination of predetermined symbols A gaming machine characterized by being included.

  According to the feature C7, since it is possible to give the player a visual sensation using various performance elements, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various performance elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature D1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subjected to the verification;
Production execution means for executing a game production;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
Effect storage means for storing the contents of the game effect;
In a gaming machine comprising
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The effect storage means stores the content of at least a part of the game effect executed in the game times prior to the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition,
The control means is a game time after a game time in which the content of the game effect is stored, and in a game time before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, A gaming machine characterized in that the effect execution means reproduces the contents of at least a part of the stored game effect.

  According to the feature D1, since the content of at least a part of the executed game effect is stored and the content of at least a part of the stored game effect is reproduced, the same content is given to the player. It is possible to give a visual feeling (dejab) that a game effect is executed a plurality of times. The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that a privilege is granted after a game effect with the same content is executed a plurality of times, the game effect is expected to be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it will always pay attention to the game production with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not a game effect having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and it is possible to suitably increase the player's degree of attention to the sequentially executed game effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Further, according to the feature D1, since the content of the executed game effect is stored and reproduced, the player will experience the game effect of the completely same content. Therefore, it is easy to give the player a visual sensation.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to Feature D1, further comprising:
Comprising an operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
The control means includes
As the game effect, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a game effect that is a target stored in the effect storage means is executed by a game effect unit, the operation acceptance effect is not selected as the game effect.

  When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation.

  According to the feature D2, since the operation acceptance effect is not selected as the game effect to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to surely give a visual feeling.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2,
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that a game effect having the same content has been reproduced, after the stored game effect has been reproduced. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D3, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can recognize that the game effect with the same content has been reproduced, and the game effect with the same content is reproduced. It is possible to convince the player that this has a special meaning.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature E1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subjected to the verification;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
Determining means for determining a display duration time required for one game round;
The total time of the shortest display continuation time that can be determined by the determining means is calculated as the display continuation time of each of a plurality of consecutive game times before the game time related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A calculation means;
In a gaming machine comprising
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means is calculated by the calculating means until the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the effect execution means executes the effect element having the same contents that can be executed a plurality of times in the total time.

  According to the feature E1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player feels that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab). Can be given. The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  In addition, according to the feature E1, the control means can display the effect elements having the same contents that can be executed a plurality of times within the total time calculated by the calculation means (the shortest display duration time that can be determined by the determination means). Since the effect execution means is executed a plurality of times, it is not limited to one that can be finished within a display duration time that is a time required for one game time for one effect element to be executed a plurality of times. That is, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. For example, it is possible to execute one stage of the effect element, which is the object to be executed a plurality of times, across the game times. Therefore, when selecting an effect element to be executed a plurality of times, the effect element can be selected without considering the execution time for one time.

  Furthermore, since the effect element having the same content that can be executed a plurality of times is executed a plurality of times in the shortest display duration time that can be determined by the determining means, the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. The time required for is less than or equal to the total display continuation time of each actual game time. Therefore, when a stage element having the same content is executed a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times before the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, the time is insufficient. It is possible to avoid and reliably execute the production element having the same contents a plurality of times.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine described in the feature E1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to feature E2, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of performance elements having the same content to be executed multiple times, or the expectation can be inflated. Can be changed.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E2,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied are completed. A game machine characterized by increasing the number of production elements of the contents of the contents as time passes.

  According to the feature E3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
Comprising an operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
The control means includes
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation.

  According to the feature E4, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Can surely give a visual sensation.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The control means provides the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect execution means after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine that is characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature E5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature E6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5,
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and changing the background image to a mode different from the normal time. A background change notice effect that causes a given character to perform a prescribed action, a lamp emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a prescribed pattern, a symbol sequence fluctuation effect that fluctuates a symbol string in a prescribed scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect for changing the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line, and a symbol stop effect for stopping a combination of predetermined symbols A gaming machine characterized by being included.

  According to the feature E6, since it is possible to give the player a visual sensation using various performance elements, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various performance elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature F1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
Determining means for determining a display duration time required for one game round;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
In a gaming machine comprising
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means determines at least one game of the game times before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. The game machine is characterized in that an effect element that can be executed a plurality of times during the display time of the game time is executed by the effect execution means a plurality of times with the same content.

According to the feature F1, since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a visual sensation (dejab) that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. .
The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given.
Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be achieved.

  In addition, according to the feature F1, in at least one game time, the effect element that can be executed a plurality of times within the display time of the game time is executed a plurality of times with the same contents, so Can be given in one game.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to feature F2, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of performance elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and the expectation can be increased. Can be changed.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F2,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied after the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game relating to the special information is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times is increased with the lapse of time during a period until the game ends.

  According to the feature F3, the number of performance elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with time, so that the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
The determination means determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the verification. Is,
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means executes the plurality of times from the game times prior to the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by starting execution of an effect element that is an object to be played.

  According to the feature F4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the visual feeling from the game times prior to the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
The control means provides the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect execution means after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine that is characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature F5, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and changing the background image to a mode different from the normal time. A background change notice effect that causes a given character to perform a prescribed action, a lamp emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a prescribed pattern, a symbol sequence fluctuation effect that fluctuates a symbol string in a prescribed scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect for changing the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line, and a symbol stop effect for stopping a combination of predetermined symbols A gaming machine characterized by being included.

  According to the feature F6, it is possible to give the player a visual sensation using various performance elements, so pay attention to the player whether or not the same content is executed multiple times in various performance elements. Can be made.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from the above-described embodiments or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature G1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information before the special information is subjected to the verification;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
Determining means for determining a display duration time required for one game round;
In a gaming machine comprising
The determination means sets a display duration of a predetermined length for at least two game times out of a plurality of game times before the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. Is to secure,
The control means executes the effect with the effect element having the same content in each game time of at least two game times before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by being executed by means.

  According to the feature G1, it is possible to execute the effect element having the same content in at least two game times in which the predetermined duration is secured by the determining means. Since the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times. The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature G2]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
The determining means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least two games out of a plurality of game times before the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition To ensure a display duration of a certain length for each time,
The control means causes the effect execution means to execute an effect element having the same contents that can be executed in each game time, in which the display duration of the predetermined length is secured by the determining means, in each game time. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature G2, the control means causes the effect execution means to execute the effect elements having the same contents that can be executed in each game time in which the determination means secures a display duration of a predetermined length. It is possible to avoid a shortage of time required for executing the same effect element at each game time, and to reliably execute the effect elements having the same contents at each game time.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine described in feature G1,
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, each of at least two of the plurality of game times before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied In the game times, the effect execution means is made to execute the effect element of the same content,
The determination means has the same content as the effect execution means for at least two game times of a plurality of game times before the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by securing a display duration of a length capable of executing a production element.

  According to the feature G3, the determining means secures a display continuation time that is long enough for the effect executing means to execute the effect element having the same contents, and therefore the time required for the effect executing means to execute the same effect element. However, it is possible to avoid the shortage in each game time, and to ensure that the effect elements having the same contents are executed in each game time.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements having the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature G4, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of performance elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and the expectation can be increased. Can be changed.

[Feature G5]
A gaming machine according to Feature G4,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied are completed. A game machine characterized in that the number of production elements of the contents of is increased with the passage of time.

  According to the feature G5, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with time, the player's expectation can be increased with time.

[Feature G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, further comprising:
Comprising an operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
The control means includes
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation.

  According to the feature G6, since the operation acceptance effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. Can surely give a visual sensation.

[Feature G7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6,
The control means provides the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect execution means after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine that is characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature G7, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature G8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7,
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and changing the background image to a mode different from the normal time. A background change notice effect that causes a given character to perform a prescribed action, a lamp emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a prescribed pattern, a symbol sequence fluctuation effect that fluctuates a symbol string in a prescribed scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect for changing the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line, and a symbol stop effect for stopping a combination of predetermined symbols A gaming machine characterized by being included.

  According to the feature G8, since it is possible to give the player a visual sensation using various effect elements, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various effect elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature H1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
Time acquisition means for acquiring time information;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
As the effect element, the effect execution means is made to execute a time-linked effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the time information,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of the time-linked effect element is started before the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In some cases, the effect execution means includes a plurality of the time-linked effect elements that are executed during at least a part of the period before the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. A gaming machine characterized by being executed once.

  According to the feature H1, since the time-linked effect element executed at least in a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with an effect having a new interest. Further, since the time-linked effect element executed at least in a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, the player feels that the time-linked effect element having the same content is executed a plurality of times (dejab). Can be given.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Further, when the player experiences that the privilege is given after the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, the time-linked effect element is executed in anticipation that the time effect element is executed a plurality of times. Attention is always focused on the time-linked production element with a high expectation every time. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information, It is possible to improve the interest of games.

  If a plurality of gaming machines having the feature H1 are installed in the gaming hall, a gaming machine that satisfies a predetermined condition and a gaming machine that does not satisfy the predetermined condition have the same time-linked effect elements. Even if is started, a time difference (shift) occurs in the time-linked effect element to be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who plays a game with a gaming machine that satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
The control means sets a specific temporal position of the time-linked effect element having a predetermined time length as a start position in the case where the effect-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature H2, the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times with a specific temporal position as the start position, so that the player has a strong response to the portion after the specific time position of the time-linked effect element. Visibility can be recognized.

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
The determination means determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the verification. Is,
The control means is a game number that starts executing after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and is a game number before the game time related to the special information that is determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game characterized in that, with the timing of starting at least two game times as a trigger, the time-linked effect element is caused to be executed by the effect execution means with the specific time position as a start position. Machine.

  According to the feature H3, it is possible to give the player a stronger visual sensation by synchronizing the start timing of each time-linked effect element executed a plurality of times with the start timing of the game times.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to Feature H2 or Feature 3,
The control means stores, as the specific time position, the time position of the time-linked effect element that is being executed at the timing when the game turn is started after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  If a specific time position is set at the end of the time-linked effect element, and the time-linked effect element starts from the specific time position, the time-linked effect element corresponding to the specific time position is In some cases, the game is not executed once at the start of the first game time of at least two game times. In this case, the time-linked effect element that was executed as a continuous series of flow until the first game round is started is suddenly interrupted at the start timing of the first game round and is executed once. A time-linked effect element is started and executed from a specific time position that is not.

  According to the feature H4, the time-linked effect that is executed at the timing when the game times after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, in other words, the first game times of the at least two game times are started. The temporal position of the element is stored as a specific temporal position, and the stored specific temporal position is used as the start position of the time-linked effect element for the second and subsequent times out of multiple executions. The time position once executed as a continuous series of flows can be set as the start position after the second time-linked effect element executed a plurality of times. Therefore, the time-linked effect element that has been executed as a continuous series of flow until the first game round is started avoids a sudden break at the start timing of the first game round, and is executed once. It is possible to avoid the start and execution of the time-linked effect element from a specific temporal position that is not present.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
The control means includes
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute a non-time-linked effect element that is executed without being based on the time information,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the non-time-linked effect element is executed together with the time-linked effect element, the time-linked effect executed at least in a part of the period. The effect execution means causes the effect execution means to execute the element and the non-time-linked effect element a plurality of times until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature H5, in addition to the time-linked effect element, the non-time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, so that a stronger visual sensation can be given to the player.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to feature H5,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means controls the number of the non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature 6, by increasing or decreasing the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times, the player's expectation can be increased or decreased, or the expectation can be reduced. Can give change.

[Feature H7]
A gaming machine according to Feature H6,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied until the game times related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied are completed. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of non-time-linked effect elements is increased with the passage of time.

  According to the feature H7, the number of non-time-linked effect elements that are one of the effect elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with the passage of time. Can be increased.

[Feature H8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7,
Comprising an operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
The control means includes
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect execution means to execute an operation acceptance effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a visual sensation.

  According to the feature H8, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the non-time-linked effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress execution of different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to surely give a visual feeling to the person.

[Feature H9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8,
The control means provides the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect execution means after the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times. A game machine that is characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature H9, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature H10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9,
The effect elements include a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and changing the background image to a mode different from the normal time. A background change notice effect that causes a given character to perform a prescribed action, a lamp emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a prescribed pattern, a symbol sequence fluctuation effect that fluctuates a symbol string in a prescribed scroll pattern, At least one of a reach effect for changing the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line, and a symbol stop effect for stopping a combination of predetermined symbols A gaming machine characterized by being included.

  According to the feature H10, since it is possible to give the player a visual sensation using various performance elements, it is determined whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times for various performance elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from the above-described embodiments or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 1 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature I1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
An operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is added to the effect executing means until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. Which is executed multiple times,
When selecting an operation acceptance effect element including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. If it is satisfied, the effect execution means executes a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution unit, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution unit.
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect executing means executes the first operation acceptance effect element,
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is selected regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. Let the production execution means execute,
When the second effect mode is not executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is selected regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution means is not executed.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature I1, when the second effect mode is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the second operation accepting effect element in the second and subsequent operation accept effect elements. On the other hand, when the second presentation mode is not executed in the first operation acceptance presentation element, the second presentation mode is not executed in the second and subsequent operation acceptance presentation elements. Even when the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation receiving effect element executed at the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
The control means includes
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the operation execution unit is caused to execute the second effect mode triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
When the second execution mode is executed when the first execution operation element is executed by the production execution unit, the first execution mode is executed by the production execution unit. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution unit when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
When the second execution mode is executed when the first execution operation element is executed by the production execution unit, the first execution mode is executed by the production execution unit. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution means when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature I2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies a predetermined operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the fact that the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has passed. . Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, since the second effect mode is executed, the game can be given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of games.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2,
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A featured gaming machine.

  The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation reception effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, and the same contents are obtained. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player is less likely to feel the visual sensation with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature I3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing unit when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing unit a plurality of times, so that the player is less likely to feel the visual sensation. Can do.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, further comprising:
Changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode when the input operation by the player is accepted;
The control means includes
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and when the second execution mode is to be executed by the production execution unit,
The change means is controlled to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I4, since the mode of the operation receiving means is changed, it is possible to give an unexpectedness to the game. Further, it is possible to give persuasive power to the execution of the second effect mode even though the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the verification,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit is configured to perform the effect execution unit before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. In addition, the game machine is characterized in that the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started.

  According to the feature I5, since the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied becomes the target of the collation, a plurality of game times In addition, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5,
The control means provides a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature I6, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 2 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature J1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
An operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is added to the effect executing means until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. Which is executed multiple times,
When selecting an operation acceptance effect element including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. If it is satisfied, the effect execution means executes a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first performance mode is executed by the performance execution unit, a third performance mode different from the first and second performance modes is provided. The production execution means is executed,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect executing means executes the first operation acceptance effect element,
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the second effect mode is selected regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. Let the production execution means execute,
When the third effect mode is executed when the effect execution means is caused to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means, the third effect mode is selected regardless of whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not. A gaming machine that is executed by an effect execution means.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature J1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, when the second performance mode is executed in the first operation acceptance performance element, the second operation reception element in the second and subsequent operation reception performance elements. On the other hand, when the third production mode is executed in the first operation acceptance production element, the third production mode is executed in the second and subsequent operation acceptance production elements. Even when the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation receiving effect element executed at the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
The control means includes
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the effect execution unit executes the second effect mode triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third execution mode is caused to be executed by the production execution unit when the predetermined time has elapsed.
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
When the second execution mode is executed when the first execution operation element is executed by the production execution unit, the first execution mode is executed by the production execution unit. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution unit when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
When the second execution mode is executed when the first execution operation element is executed by the production execution unit, the first execution mode is executed by the production execution unit. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second execution mode is caused to be executed by the production execution unit when the predetermined time has elapsed,
When the third execution mode is executed when the first execution operation element is executed by the production execution unit, the first execution mode is executed by the production execution unit. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution unit when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
When the third execution mode is executed when the first execution operation element is executed by the production execution unit, the first execution mode is executed by the production execution unit. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third execution mode is caused to be executed by the effect execution means when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature J2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third time is triggered by the fact that the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since the effect mode is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third effect mode is executed when the predetermined time has passed. be able to. Further, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third production mode is executed, so that an unexpectedness is given to the game. Can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A featured gaming machine.

  The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation reception effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, and the same contents are obtained. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player is less likely to feel the visual sensation with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature J3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing unit when the operation receiving effect element is executed by the effect executing unit a plurality of times. Can do.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
Changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode when the input operation by the player is accepted;
The control means includes
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and when the second execution mode is to be executed by the production execution unit,
The change means is controlled to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature J4, since the mode of the operation receiving means is changed, the game can be given unexpectedness, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player is not satisfied with the predetermined operation condition. It is possible to give persuasive power to the execution of the two effects.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the verification,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit is configured to perform the effect execution unit before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. In addition, the game machine is characterized in that the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the characteristic J5, since the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation, a plurality of game times In addition, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling.
[Feature J6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5,
The control means provides a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature J6, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 3 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature K1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
An operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is added to the effect executing means until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. Which is executed multiple times,
When selecting an operation acceptance effect element including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode, regardless of whether it is satisfied or not.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

According to the feature K1, since the second effect mode is executed after the first effect mode is executed regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times. Even so, it is possible to make the contents of the operation acceptance effect elements executed at the first time and the second time or later the same.
Then, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature K2]
A gaming machine according to the feature K1,
The control means includes
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the effect execution unit executes the second effect mode triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second execution mode is caused to be executed by the production execution unit when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature K2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies a predetermined operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the fact that the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has passed. . Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, since the second effect mode is executed, the game can be given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of games.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A featured gaming machine.

  The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation reception effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, and the same contents are obtained. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player is less likely to feel the visual sensation with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature K3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution unit when the operation execution effect element is executed by the effect execution unit a plurality of times. Can do.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3,
Changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode when the input operation by the player is accepted;
The control means includes
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and when the second execution mode is to be executed by the production execution unit,
The change means is controlled to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K4, since the mode of the operation receiving means is changed, the game can be given unexpectedness, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player is not satisfied with the predetermined operation condition. It is possible to give persuasive power to the execution of the two effects.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the verification,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit is configured to perform the effect execution unit before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. In addition, the game machine is characterized in that the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started.

According to the characteristic K5, since the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation, a plurality of game times In addition, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling.
[Feature K6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5,
The control means provides a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature K6, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 4 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature L1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
An operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is added to the effect executing means until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. Which is executed multiple times,
When selecting an operation acceptance effect element including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
The selection screen includes a content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player and allows the player to select one option from a plurality of options, and the operation of the input operation received by the operation receiving unit While displaying a selection screen on which the selection state is switched every time the mode satisfies a predetermined operation condition,
The effect execution means is caused to execute an effect mode corresponding to an option selected at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
While displaying the same selection screen as the selection screen displayed for the first time on the effect execution means,
A gaming machine, wherein the production execution unit is caused to execute the same production mode as the production mode corresponding to the option selected at the first time when the predetermined time has passed.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature L1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, in the operation acceptance effect element executed after the second time, the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first operation acceptance effect element. Since it is executed, even if the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation receiving effect element executed at the first time and after the second time can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature L2]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the selection screen has the same mode before and after the selection state is switched.

  According to the feature L2, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the same effect mode is executed from the selection screen of the same mode, so that a stronger visual sensation is given to the player. Can do.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A featured gaming machine.

  The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation reception effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, and the same contents are obtained. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player is less likely to feel the visual sensation with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature L3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing unit when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing unit a plurality of times. Can do.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the verification,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit is configured to perform the effect execution unit before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. In addition, the game machine is characterized in that the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started.

  According to the feature L4, since the execution of the effect element which is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation, a plurality of game times In addition, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The control means provides a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature L5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from the above-described embodiments or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 5 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature M1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
An operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is added to the effect executing means until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. Which is executed multiple times,
When selecting an operation acceptance effect element including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
A selection screen that includes content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, and that allows the player to select one rendering mode from among a plurality of rendering modes, wherein the selection state changes over time. Is displayed on the effect execution means,
Regardless of whether the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving means satisfies a predetermined operation condition or not, a single performance mode is selected from the plurality of performance modes The selected performance mode is executed by the production execution means,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
While displaying the same selection screen as the selection screen displayed for the first time on the effect execution means,
Whether the operation mode satisfies the operation condition or not, the same production mode as the production mode selected for the first time is selected, and the selected production is performed. A game machine characterized in that the aspect is executed by the effect execution means.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature M1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, in the operation acceptance effect element executed after the second time, the same effect mode as the effect mode executed in the first operation acceptance effect element. Since the selection / execution is performed, even if the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation receiving effect element executed at the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine according to the feature M1,
The control means includes
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, a state where one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition. ,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, when the predetermined time has elapsed, a single effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes. And
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element for the second time or later,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same effect mode as the effect mode selected for the first time is selected when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. State and
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same production mode as the first production mode selected when the predetermined time has elapsed is selected. A gaming machine characterized by being a thing.

  According to the feature M2, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, an effect mode is selected from a plurality of performance modes triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition. Since it is in the selected state, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. In addition, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, one of the plurality of performance modes is triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. Can be selected.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to the feature M1 or the feature M2,
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A featured gaming machine.

  The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation reception effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, and the same contents are obtained. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player is less likely to feel the visual sensation with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature M3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution unit when the operation execution effect element is executed by the effect execution unit a plurality of times. Can do.

[Feature M4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the verification,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit is configured to perform the effect execution unit before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. In addition, the game machine is characterized in that the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started.

  According to the feature M4, since the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation, a plurality of game times In addition, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4,
The control means provides a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature M5, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 6 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
An operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is added to the effect executing means until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. Which is executed multiple times,
When selecting an operation acceptance effect element including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
The effect execution unit executes a first effect mode that includes the content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player and causes the effect execution unit to display a predetermined parameter that changes in a certain direction over time. Let
A gaming machine, wherein after the parameter satisfies a predetermined parameter condition, the effect execution means is caused to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature N1, after the first effect mode is executed, the parameter satisfies the predetermined parameter condition regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, and the second effect mode is executed. Therefore, even when the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation receiving effect elements executed at the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the existing feeling has a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the existing feeling, for example, that there is a possibility that a privilege may be given. Furthermore, if the player experiences that the privilege has been granted after the same content element is executed a plurality of times, the player expects that the same content element will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, attention is paid to the production elements with a high expectation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the production element having the same content is executed a plurality of times, and to appropriately increase the player's attention to the production elements that are executed sequentially, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature N2]
A gaming machine according to the feature N1,
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute a speed changing process for changing the changing speed of the parameter when the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature N2, the player operates the operation receiving unit so that the operation mode of the input operation satisfies a predetermined operation condition in an attempt to change the parameter change speed. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine described in feature N2,
When the control means changes the parameter in the direction of decreasing with time, the decrease rate of the parameter decreases as the number of input operations received per unit time by the operation receiving means increases. Further, the game machine characterized in that the speed changing process is executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the feature N3, the player operates the operation receiving means so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time in an attempt to decrease the parameter decrease rate. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine described in feature N2,
When the control means changes the parameter in the direction of increasing with time, the increase speed of the parameter increases as the number of input operations received per unit time by the operation receiving means increases. Further, the game machine characterized in that the speed changing process is executed by the effect executing means.

  According to the feature N4, the player operates the operation receiving means so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time in an attempt to increase the parameter increase rate. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4,
The control means includes
When the first execution operation acceptance element is executed by the effect execution means, the process of changing the parameter is stored,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the operation receiving effect element for the second time or later is executed by the effect executing means, the effect executing means reproduces the process of changing the stored parameter.

  According to the feature N5, since the process of changing the parameters is the same in the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a stronger visual sensation.

[Feature N6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5, further comprising:
Changing means for changing the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode when the input operation by the player is accepted;
The control means includes
When causing the effect execution means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element, the process of changing the mode of the operation accepting means when the input operation is accepted is stored.
The game is characterized in that the change means reproduces the stored change process of the operation acceptance means when the effect execution means executes the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements. Machine.

  According to the feature N6, since the mode of the operation receiving means is changed, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the game. Further, since the process of changing the mode of the operation receiving means in the first operation receiving effect element is reproduced in the second and subsequent operation receiving effect elements, a stronger visual sensation can be given to the player.

[Feature N7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the verification,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit is configured to perform the effect execution unit before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. In addition, the game machine is characterized in that the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started.

  According to the feature N7, since the execution of the effect element that is to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied becomes the target of the collation, a plurality of game times In addition, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N7,
The control means provides a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, after the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  According to the feature N8, since the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, the player can recognize that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element having the same content can be recognized. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from the above-described embodiments or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 7 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature O1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
An operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is added to the effect executing means until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. Which is executed multiple times,
When selecting an operation acceptance effect element including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. If it is satisfied, the effect execution means executes a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution unit, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect execution unit.
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, or the second effect mode is once in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. If not,
A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the characteristic O1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation reception effect elements that are executed a plurality of times, the operation reception effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same content It is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the production element is executed a plurality of times. And when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player is notified that the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times. In addition to being able to recognize, it is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the operation acceptance effect element having the same contents is executed a plurality of times.

  Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, each time the operation acceptance effect element is executed in the hope that the suggestion effect will be executed, The operation accepting means is operated so that the same input operation is performed and the operation acceptance effect mode is executed with the same content, and the occurrence of the suggestion effect is expected. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the player's degree of attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic O1,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the control unit executes the second effect mode on the effect execution unit when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. A gaming machine characterized by being made to be.

  According to the feature O2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies a predetermined operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the fact that the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to feature O1 or feature O2,
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A featured gaming machine.

  The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation reception effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, and the same contents are obtained. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player is less likely to feel the visual sensation with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature O3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing unit when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing unit a plurality of times. Can do.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the verification,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit is configured to perform the effect execution unit before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. In addition, the game machine is characterized in that the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started.

  According to the characteristic O4, since the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation, the plurality of game times In addition, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each embodiment described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 8 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature P1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is matched with predetermined privilege grant information;
Informing means for informing the result of the collation of the special information every game time;
As a result of the collation of the special information, when the information included in the special information matches the privilege granting information, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege to the player;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
Production execution means for executing a game production composed of production elements;
Control means for controlling the effect execution means;
An operation receiving means for accepting an input operation by a player;
In a gaming machine comprising
The control means includes
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is added to the effect executing means until the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition are completed. Which is executed multiple times,
When selecting an operation acceptance effect element including contents suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
After causing the effect execution means to execute the first effect mode including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player, the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving unit satisfies a predetermined operation condition. If it is satisfied, the effect execution means executes a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
A third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes if the operation mode does not satisfy a predetermined operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect execution means. Is executed by the production execution means,
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, or the third effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. in case of,
A gaming machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation acceptance effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

  When the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, it may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player.

  According to the feature P1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that are executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same contents, and the same contents It is possible to give the player a visual feeling (dejab) that the production element is executed a plurality of times. And when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the suggestion effect is executed by the effect execution means, so that the player is notified that the effect element with the same content is executed a plurality of times. In addition to being able to recognize, it is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning that the operation acceptance effect element having the same contents is executed a plurality of times.

Further, when the player experiences the suggestion effect after the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, each time the operation acceptance effect element is executed in the hope that the suggestion effect will be executed, The operation accepting means is operated so that the same input operation is performed and the operation acceptance effect mode is executed with the same content, and the occurrence of the suggestion effect is expected.
Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the player's degree of attention to the operation acceptance effect elements that are sequentially executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine according to feature P1,
The control means includes
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the effect execution unit executes the second effect mode triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third execution mode is caused to be executed by the production execution unit when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature P2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies a predetermined operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the fact that the operation mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition. Since this is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation acceptance effect element, and a sense of unity with the game can be provided to the player. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has passed. . Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed, so that the game can be given unexpectedness. It is possible to improve the interest of games.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The control means includes
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the operation receiving effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As the control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, a time parameter indicating whether or not the input operation can be accepted is not displayed on the effect execution means. A featured gaming machine.

  The player may perform an input operation at different timings in each of the operation reception effect elements that are executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements that have been executed a plurality of times, and the same contents are obtained. Even if the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player is less likely to feel the visual sensation with respect to the operation acceptance effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature P3, the time parameter is not displayed on the effect executing unit when the operation accepting effect element is executed by the effect executing unit a plurality of times, so that the player is less likely to feel the visual sensation. Can do.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied before the special information is subject to the verification,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control unit is configured to perform the effect execution unit before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is to be the target of the collation. In addition, the game machine is characterized in that the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started.

  According to the characteristic P4, since the execution of the effect element that is the target to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the target of the collation, a plurality of game times In addition, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the existing visual feeling.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth and ninth embodiments.

[Feature Q1]
Launching means for launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entry part (second start port 208a in the eighth embodiment, second start port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which the launched game ball can enter,
A passing part through which the launched game ball can pass (through gate 206 in the eighth embodiment, through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment);
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. A state transition means for transitioning between the second state which is a state (opening / closing door 208b in the eighth embodiment, opening / closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment),
Distribution means for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the eighth embodiment, first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment),
A first route (route R1 in the eighth embodiment, route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passage section;
A second route (route R2 in the eighth embodiment, route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured such that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passage portion;
With
The distribution means includes
The game balls that have arrived are distributed to the first route,
The game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route,
The game balls that have arrived after the game balls to be distributed to the second path are configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first route and the second route are such that the distributed game balls can enter the entrance portion when the entrance portion is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

  According to the feature Q1, the game balls distributed to the first route (hereinafter also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passage part, and the entrance part is in the second state. In some cases, it is possible to enter the entrance section. On the other hand, a game ball that has arrived after the first game ball (hereinafter also referred to as a second game ball) is distributed to the second route, so that it cannot pass through the passage part and enters the ball. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the entrance part. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passage part, and whether each of the first and second game balls enters the entrance part. Whether or not depends on whether or not the first and second game balls are in the second state at the timing when the first and second game balls reach the first ball. Therefore, of two game balls (first game ball and second game ball), the number of game balls that may pass through the passage part is one, and the game that enters the entrance part. Since the number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the ball-entering part, the game can be diversified.

  For example, the length of time for which the ball-entry unit maintains the second state after transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball-entry unit transitions from the first state to the second state, In the case where the timing at which the entrance portion transitions from the first state to the second state is controlled to be different for each mode, the entrance portion of the first and second game balls Since the number of game balls entering the game can be made different for each mode, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Feature Q2]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1,
Lottery execution means (the process shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery when the game ball has passed through the passage section;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery (the processes shown in FIGS. 76, 77, and 83);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature Q2, the control means controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passing portion. Since the second game ball does not pass through the passage portion, the control means is configured to output the first and second game balls in a situation where the game ball is continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined launch intensity by the launch means. Whether the state of the entrance part at the timing when each of the entrance parts reaches the entrance part is set to the first state or the second state, that is, each of the first and second game balls is set to the entrance part. Whether or not to enter the ball is determined based on the result of the lottery executed when the first game ball passes through the passing portion and the mode of control of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) enters the ball-entry unit. This can be realized by a series of controls triggered by passing through the passage section.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q2,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means (first and second high frequency support modes in the eighth embodiment, and first to third high frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment). And
For each control mode, after the game ball has passed through the passing portion, the length of time for which the ball entering portion maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state. The length of time until the entrance part starts to transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the entrance part transitions from the first state to the second state, A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the timings at which the ball-entry portion transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

  According to the feature Q3, the number of game balls entering the entrance portion of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) may be different for each control mode. Because it can, you can diversify the game.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to feature Q2 or feature Q3,
Display means (common figure unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means;
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing part until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing part is displayed by the display means is as follows:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to a time shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage part to when the game ball reaches the entrance part.

  According to the feature Q4, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the first game ball that has passed the passage part and becomes the trigger for the lottery reaches the ball entrance part. . Since the control means starts the control based on the lottery result after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the first game ball that has passed the passage part and becomes the trigger for the lottery is the entrance part. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing to reach.

  For example, the control means can realize a control mode in which the incoming game unit is in the second state at the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passing unit reaches the incoming game unit.

[Feature Q5]
A gaming machine according to feature Q4,
After the game ball has passed through the passing part, the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passing part is displayed by the display means, and the ball entering part is in the second state. The time until the transition to
A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to a time shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage part to when the game ball reaches the entrance part.

  According to the feature Q5, the control means can realize a control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passage part reaches the second ball entry part in the second state. Become.

[Feature Q6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q5,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation in which game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined launch intensity by the launching means, the game balls distributed to the first path and passing through the passage portion reach the entrance portion. The timing at which the pitched portion is in the second state and the pitched portion is in the first state at the timing at which game balls distributed to the second path reach the pitched portion. Control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment),
In a situation in which game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval with a predetermined launch intensity by the launching means, the game balls distributed to the first path and passing through the passage portion reach the entrance portion. In the timing, the pitched part is in the second state, and at the timing when the game balls distributed to the second path reach the pitched part, the pitched part is in the second state. Control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature Q6, the first game ball enters the entrance portion, but the second game ball does not enter the entrance portion, the first control mode, the first game ball and the second game ball Since it is possible to realize the second control mode in which both game balls enter the entrance part, it is possible to add inflection to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature Q7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q5,
The distribution means includes
One game ball that has reached is distributed to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment), and
N game balls arrived after the game balls distributed to the first route (N is an integer of 2 or more) are distributed to the second route (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine configured to distribute one game ball that has arrived after N game balls distributed to the second route to the first route.

  According to the feature Q7, one game ball is distributed to the first route and N game balls are distributed to the second route. Therefore, each of the (N + 1) game balls is entered. The control of whether or not to enter the part can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passage part. As a result, diversification of games can be achieved. For example, if the number of game balls entering the entrance part of (N + 1) game balls is different for each control mode, various controls with different numbers of game balls entering the entrance part are possible. The mode can be realized.

[Feature Q8]
A gaming machine according to feature Q7,
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery triggered by a game ball passing through the passage section;
Display means for displaying a result of the lottery by the lottery execution means;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
With
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the launching means at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passage portion is the incoming ball. At the timing to reach the part, the pitched part is in the second state, and at all timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the pitched part, A first control mode that is a first state (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment);
In a situation where game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the launching means at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passage portion is the incoming ball. The timing at which the ball enters the second state and the timing at which at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball at the timing to reach the ball In the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode and the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entry portion is in the second state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to feature Q8, a first control mode in which the first game ball enters the entrance part but N game balls do not enter the entrance part, and the first game ball enters the entrance part. Since at least one game ball out of the N game balls can enter the second control mode for entering the entrance part, an inflection can be given to the game. Can be improved.

[Feature Q9]
A gaming machine according to Feature Q7 or Feature Q8,
The second route is configured by N routes (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distribution means includes an alternating distribution mechanism (a first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and a second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes game balls to any one of two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured in multiple stages.

  According to the feature Q9, the function of distributing one game ball reached to the first route and distributing N game balls arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route is Compared to a configuration realized using control or the like, the configuration can be realized with a simple configuration. In addition, as a structure which implement | achieves the said function using electronic control etc., for example, a game ball using the structure etc. which measure the number of game balls which reached | attained using a counter etc. and are driven by an electric force The structure which distributes can be mentioned.

[Feature Q10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q9,
Provided with a third path (path R2 in Example 1 and Example 4 in FIG. 84) configured such that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passage part;
The distribution means includes
One game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first route (route R11 in example 1 of FIG. 84, route R111 in example 4 of FIG. 84), and
At least one game ball among a plurality of game balls that arrives after the game balls distributed to the first route is designated as the second route (route R12 in example 1 in FIG. 84, route in example 4 in FIG. 84). R12 and route R112)
Distributing at least one game ball among a plurality of game balls reached after the game ball distributed to the first path to the third path;
The game balls distributed to the second route and one game ball reached after the game balls distributed to the third route are configured to be distributed to the first route,
The third path is configured such that the distributed game balls cannot enter the entrance portion even when the entrance portion is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature Q10, since the distributed game balls are provided with the third path configured to be unable to enter the entrance portion, it is possible to further diversify the games. For example, if the configuration is such that a large number of game balls are distributed to the third route, the number of game balls entering the ball entrance portion can be reduced.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature R1]
Launching means for launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entrance part (second start port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which the launched game ball can enter,
Execution means (main control device 60) for executing a pitching assistance mode (high frequency support mode) for assisting the game ball to enter the pitching part;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entrance section;
A gaming machine comprising
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity is defined as a launch rate. If
The execution means includes
N types (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2) of the entrance assistance modes having different exit rates can be executed,
As one of the n types of entry assistance modes, at least the game ball reduction mode (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the exit rate is less than 1, and the exit rate is More than one game ball increase mode (third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) can be executed,
Defining the exit rate when the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) entrance assist mode is being executed as Mi;
Pi is defined as the ratio of execution of the i-th entry assist mode to the execution of the entry assist mode.
The following relational expression (R1)

A gaming machine characterized by being configured to satisfy the above requirements.

  According to the feature R1, although the game ball increase mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1 can be executed as one aspect of the ball entry assistance mode, the ball exit as a total when the ball entry assistance mode is executed Since the rate is less than 1, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement in the game ball increasing mode, and to suppress an excessive increase in the player's gambling feeling. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
The execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the game ball increasing modes (third high-frequency support mode and fourth high-frequency support mode in the modified example 5) having different ball-out rates. .

  According to the feature R2, a plurality of types of game ball increasing modes having different ball-out rates can be executed, and therefore, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of exhilaration imparted to the player in the game ball increasing mode. As a result, inflection can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
A passing portion (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which the launched game ball can pass;
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. A state transition means (opening / closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state which is a state;
Lottery execution means (the process shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery when the game ball has passed through the passage section;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the lottery result (the processes shown in FIGS. 76 and 83);
Distribution means for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths (first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment);
The distributed game balls can pass through the passing section, and can enter the entering section when the entering section is in the second state. A first route configured in (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
The distributed game balls cannot pass through the passage part, and can enter the entrance part when the entrance part is in the second state. A second route configured as described above (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
With
The distribution means includes
One game ball that has reached is distributed to the first route,
N game balls that have arrived after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route,
1 game ball that has arrived after N game balls distributed to the second path is configured to distribute to the first path;
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and the game ball increase mode is performed by executing one control mode of the plurality of control modes by the control means. The mode to be realized,
The gaming ball reduction mode is a mode realized by executing another control mode of the plurality of control modes by the control means.

  According to the feature R3, one game ball distributed to the first route (hereinafter also referred to as a first game ball) can pass through the passage portion, and the ball entry portion is the second ball portion. In this state, it is possible to enter the entrance part. On the other hand, the N game balls that have arrived after the first game ball are distributed to the second route, so that they cannot pass through the passage part and the entrance part is in the second state. In this case, it is possible to enter the entrance section. That is, of the first game ball and the N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passage portion, and each of the first game ball and the N game balls Whether or not a game ball enters the entrance part is determined by whether the entrance part is the second at the timing when each of the first game balls and the N game balls reaches the entrance part. It depends on whether or not it is in a state.

  Since the N game balls that have arrived after the first game ball do not pass through the passing portion, the control means is in a situation in which the game balls are continuously being fired by the launch means at a predetermined launch intensity at a predetermined interval. , Whether the state of the incoming ball part at the timing when each of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the incoming ball part is the first state or the second state, That is, whether or not each of the first game balls and the N game balls is to enter the entrance portion is executed when the first game ball has passed the passage portion. This is determined by the lottery result and the mode of control of the state transition means set for each control mode. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the (N + 1) game balls enters the entrance portion is triggered by the fact that one game ball (first game ball) has passed through the passage portion. It can be realized by a series of controls.

  Further, according to the feature R3, the length of time for which the ball-entry unit maintains the second state after the ball-entry unit transitions from the first state to the second state, and the ball-entry unit changes from the first state to the second state. In the case where the number of times of transition to the state, the timing at which the pitching portion transitions from the first state to the second state, and the like are controlled to be different for each control mode, (N + 1) game balls Since the number of game balls entering the entrance portion can be made different for each control mode, the exit rate in each control mode can be set to a different value.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to feature R3,
The control means, as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the launching means at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passage portion is the incoming ball. At the timing to reach the part, the pitched part is in the second state, and at all timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the pitched part, A first control mode that is a first state (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment);
In a situation where game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the launching means at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passage portion is the incoming ball. The timing at which the ball enters the second state and the timing at which at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball at the timing to reach the ball In the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode and the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entry portion is in the second state,
Have
The game ball increase mode is a mode realized by executing the second control mode by the control means,
The gaming ball reduction mode is a mode realized by executing the first control mode by the control means.

  According to the feature R4, the first game ball enters the entrance part, but the N game balls do not enter the entrance part, and the first game ball enters the entrance part. Since at least one game ball out of the N game balls can achieve a game ball increasing mode for entering the entrance part, it is possible to give inflection to the game, Improvements can be made.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature S1]
Launching means for launching a game ball (game ball launching mechanism 81);
Distribution means for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths (first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment);
With
The distribution means includes
One game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
A second path (the path in the ninth embodiment) is a path different from the first path for N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls that have arrived after the game balls distributed to the first path. R2 and route R12)
A gaming machine configured to distribute one game ball that has arrived after N game balls distributed to the second route to the first route.

  According to the feature S1, among the (N + 1) game balls, one game ball (hereinafter also referred to as the first game ball) is distributed to the first route, and N arrives after the first game ball. Since the individual game balls can be distributed to the second route, it is possible to diversify the game by effectively using the first route and the second route, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  For example, in the case of a configuration in which a ball-entry unit or a predetermined accessory that allows a game ball to enter is provided at a position where only the first game ball distributed to the first route can reach, (N + 1) Among the game balls, only the first game ball is made to reach the entrance part or the predetermined accessory, and N game balls that have arrived after the first game ball are made the entrance part or the predetermined accessory. It becomes possible not to reach. Furthermore, at the time of designing the gaming machine, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to the second route) to a desired value, the proportion of game balls that reach the entrance part or a predetermined accessory is determined. It can be set to a desired ratio. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved and the diversification of the game can be achieved.

[Feature S2]
A gaming machine according to the feature S1,
Provided with a passing portion (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which a game ball can pass,
The first route is configured such that game balls distributed to the first route can pass through the passing part,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second path is configured such that game balls distributed to the second path cannot pass through the passage part.

  According to the feature S2, only the first game ball among the (N + 1) game balls can pass through the passage portion. Accordingly, when the predetermined process is executed when the game ball has passed through the passage portion, the predetermined process is performed every time (N + 1) game balls reach the distribution means. It can be executed at the rate of times.

  For example, in a case where a predetermined lottery is executed when a game ball has passed through the passing portion, the predetermined lottery is 1 every time (N + 1) game balls reach the sorting means. It will be executed at the rate of times. Further, at the time of designing the gaming machine, by setting the value of N (the number of game balls distributed to the second route) to a desired value, the frequency at which the predetermined lottery is executed is set to the desired frequency. be able to. Accordingly, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved and the diversification of the game can be achieved.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine described in feature S2,
A ball entrance part (second start port 308a in the ninth embodiment) into which the launched game ball can enter,
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. A state transition means (opening / closing door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state which is a state;
With
The first route and the second route are such that the distributed game balls can enter the entrance portion when the entrance portion is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

  According to the feature S3, the first game balls distributed to the first route can pass through the passing portion, and when the entering portion is in the second state, the entering portion It becomes possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, the N game balls that have arrived after the first game ball are distributed to the second route, so that they cannot pass through the passage part and the entrance part is in the second state. In this case, it is possible to enter the entrance section. That is, of the first game ball and the N game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passage portion, and each of the first game ball and the N game balls Whether or not a game ball enters the entrance part is determined by whether the entrance part is the second at the timing when each of the first game balls and the N game balls reaches the entrance part. It depends on whether or not it is in a state. Therefore, out of (N + 1) game balls, the number of game balls that may pass through the passage part is set to 1, and the number of game balls entering the entrance part is changed to the state of the entrance part. Since it can be changed depending on the game, diversification of games can be achieved.

  For example, the length of time for which the ball-entry unit maintains the second state after transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball-entry unit transitions from the first state to the second state, When the configuration is such that the timing at which the incoming ball part transitions from the first state to the second state is controlled differently for each mode, the incoming part of (N + 1) game balls Since the number of game balls to enter can be made different for each mode, the game can be diversified.

[Feature S4]
A gaming machine according to the feature S3,
Lottery execution means (the process shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery when the game ball has passed through the passage section;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the lottery result (the processes shown in FIGS. 76 and 83);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature S4, the control means controls the state transition means based on the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passing portion. Since the N game balls that have arrived after the first game ball do not pass through the passing portion, the control means is in a situation in which the game balls are continuously being fired by the launch means at a predetermined launch intensity at a predetermined interval. , Whether the state of the incoming ball part at the timing when each of the first game ball and the N game balls reaches the incoming ball part is the first state or the second state, That is, whether or not each of the first game balls and the N game balls is to enter the entrance portion is executed when the first game ball has passed the passage portion. This is determined by the result of the lottery and the mode of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the (N + 1) game balls enters the entrance portion is triggered by the fact that one game ball (first game ball) has passed through the passage portion. It can be realized by a series of controls.

[Feature S5]
A gaming machine according to feature S4,
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first to third high-frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means,
For each control mode, after the game ball has passed through the passing portion, the length of time for which the ball entering portion maintains the second state after transitioning from the first state to the second state. The length of time until the entrance part starts to transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the entrance part transitions from the first state to the second state, A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the timings at which the ball-entry portion transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

  According to the feature S5, since the number of game balls that enter the entrance portion of the (N + 1) game balls can be made different for each control mode, it is possible to diversify the game. it can.

[Feature S6]
A gaming machine according to feature S5,
Display means (common figure unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means;
The time from when the game ball passes through the passing part until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball passes through the passing part is displayed by the display means is as follows:
A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to a time shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage part to when the game ball reaches the entrance part.

  According to the feature S6, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the first game ball that has passed the passage part and becomes the trigger for the lottery reaches the entrance part. . Since the control means starts the control based on the lottery result after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the first game ball that has passed the passage part and becomes the trigger for the lottery is the entrance part. The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing to reach.

  For example, the control means can realize a control mode in which the incoming game unit is in the second state at the timing when the first game ball that has passed through the passing unit reaches the incoming game unit.

[Feature S7]
A gaming machine according to feature S7,
After the game ball has passed through the passing part, the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passing part is displayed by the display means, and the ball entering part is in the second state. The time until the transition to
A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to a time shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage part to when the game ball reaches the entrance part.

  According to the feature S7, the control means can realize a control mode in which the first game ball that has passed through the passage part reaches the second ball entry part at the timing when the first ball is in the second state. Become.

[Feature S8]
A gaming machine according to feature S7,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the launching means at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passage portion is the incoming ball. At the timing to reach the part, the pitched part is in the second state, and at all timings when the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the pitched part, A first control mode that is a first state (first high-frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment);
In a situation where game balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by the launching means at a predetermined interval, one game ball that has been distributed to the first path and passed through the passage portion is the incoming ball. The timing at which the ball enters the second state and the timing at which at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball at the timing to reach the ball In the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode and the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entry portion is in the second state,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature S8, the first game ball enters the entrance part, but the N game balls do not enter the entrance part, and the first game ball enters the entrance part. Since at least one game ball out of the N game balls can enter the second control mode for entering the entrance part, an inflection can be given to the game. Can be improved.

[Feature S9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S8,
The second route is composed of a plurality of routes (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distribution means includes an alternating distribution mechanism (a first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and a second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes game balls to any one of two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured in multiple stages.

  According to the feature S9, the function of distributing one game ball reached to the first route and distributing N game balls arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route is Compared to a configuration realized using control or the like, the configuration can be realized with a simple configuration. In addition, as a structure which implement | achieves the said function using electronic control etc., for example, a game ball using the structure etc. which measure the number of game balls which reached | attained using a counter etc. and are driven by an electric force The structure which distributes can be mentioned.

[Feature S10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S9,
A third path (path R2 in Example 4 of FIG. 84) configured such that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passage section;
The distribution means includes
One game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first route (route R111 in Example 4 in FIG. 84), and
Distributing at least N game balls of the plurality of game balls that have arrived after the game balls distributed to the first route to the second route (route R12 and route R112 in Example 4 of FIG. 84),
Distributing at least one game ball among a plurality of game balls reached after the game ball distributed to the first path to the third path;
The game balls distributed to the second route and one game ball reached after the game balls distributed to the third route are configured to be distributed to the first route,
The third path is configured such that the distributed game balls cannot enter the entrance portion even when the entrance portion is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature S10, since the distributed game balls are provided with the third path configured to be unable to enter the entrance portion, it is possible to further diversify the games. For example, if the configuration is such that a large number of game balls are distributed to the third route, the number of game balls entering the ball entrance portion can be reduced.

<Feature T group>
The feature T group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entry part (second start port 208a in the tenth embodiment) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter;
A passing portion (through gate 206 in the tenth embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the gaming area can pass;
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. State transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) for transitioning between the second state which is a state;
Control means for controlling the state transition means triggered by a game ball passing through the passage section;
With
The control means includes
Based on the gaming state (in the tenth embodiment, the result of the electric utility release lottery and the type of support mode),
A transition start waiting time that is a time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the incoming ball portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, It is possible to set the length of the fluctuation time of the figure unit 38 + the waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b) to a plurality of types of lengths.
In a situation in which game balls are continuously being fired by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity at a predetermined interval, a predetermined time (1.2 in the tenth embodiment after the game ball GB1 has passed through the through gate 206). The gaming machine, wherein the number of game balls that enter the entrance portion per second (FIGS. 87 and 89) varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time set by the control means.

  According to the feature T1, since the number of game balls that enter the entrance portion can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to add inflection to the game and improve the interest of the game. be able to. Further, according to the feature T1, for example, even when the time during which the ball-entry unit maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in the tenth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the number of game balls entering the entrance portion can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine according to feature T1,
Lottery execution means (the process shown in step S5109 in FIG. 91) for executing a lottery when the game ball has passed through the passage section;
Display means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery executing means (common figure unit 38);
With
The control means includes
Based on the gaming state (in the tenth embodiment, as a result of the lottery for opening the electrical equipment),
The time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the door 208b is opened). It is possible to set the length of (waiting time) to a plurality of types of lengths.

  According to the feature T2, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal map unit 38 + opening waiting time of the open / close door 208b) is from the game ball passing through the passing portion until the lottery result is displayed by the display means. And the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b). The total waiting time). Therefore, according to the feature T2, when the game ball passes through the passage part and the time until the result of the lottery is displayed on the display means (the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there is a plurality of types of time (opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state. By setting the length, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal unit 38 + opening waiting time of the open / close door 208b) to a plurality of types of lengths. That is, according to the feature T2, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b) Can be changed to change the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) and also change the number of game balls entering the entrance portion. Can do.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
The ball entry portion is configured such that a game ball that has passed through the passage portion can enter when the ball is in the second state,
The control means includes
The time until the result of the lottery executed when the game ball has passed through the passage portion and the game ball has passed through the passage portion is displayed on the display means (variation of the normal unit 38) Time,
The game ball is set to a time shorter than the time from the game ball passing through the passage part until the game ball reaches the ball entry part.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature T3, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the passing portion and becomes the trigger for the lottery reaches the ball entering portion. As a result, after the lottery result is displayed by the display means, the control means, before the timing at which the game ball that has passed the passage section and triggered the lottery reaches the entrance section, It is possible to execute control for starting the transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the game ball that triggered the transition to the second state (the game ball that passed through the passing unit and triggered the lottery) entered the ball transition that transitioned to the second state. It becomes possible to make it.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The entrance portion is configured such that a game ball that has passed through the passage portion can enter the entrance portion when the entrance portion is in the second state,
The control means includes
The transition start waiting time which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the incoming ball portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, First time for setting a time shorter than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to the time when the game ball reaches the entering portion is set as a first time. Control and
The transition start waiting time which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passing portion to when the incoming ball portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (in the tenth embodiment, The second time is set to a time longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passage part to the time when the game ball reaches the ball entry part. Control and
It is possible to execute a game machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature T4, when the first control is executed, the game unit that has passed through the passage unit transitions to the second state at the timing when the game ball reaches the ball entry unit. When the second control is executed, the game ball that has passed through the ball enters the ball entry unit. Since it has not changed to the state of 2, the game ball that has passed through the passing portion does not enter the entering portion. That is, according to the feature T4, since the number of game balls entering the entrance part can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to add inflection to the game and improve the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

[Feature T5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T4,
A distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 in the tenth embodiment) for distributing the reached game balls to a plurality of paths;
A first route (route R1 in the tenth embodiment) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passage part; and
A second route (route R2 in the tenth embodiment) configured such that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing portion;
With
The distribution means includes
The game balls that have arrived are distributed to the first route,
The game balls that arrive after the game balls distributed to the first route are distributed to the second route,
The game balls that have arrived after the game balls to be distributed to the second path are configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first route and the second route are such that the distributed game balls can enter the entrance portion when the entrance portion is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by being configured.

  According to the feature T5, the game balls distributed to the first route (hereinafter also referred to as the first game ball) can pass through the passage portion, and the entrance portion is in the second state. In some cases, it is possible to enter the entrance section. On the other hand, a game ball that has arrived after the first game ball (hereinafter also referred to as a second game ball) is distributed to the second route, so that it cannot pass through the passage part and enters the ball. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the entrance part. That is, of the first and second game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passage part, and whether each of the first and second game balls enters the entrance part. Whether or not depends on whether or not the first and second game balls are in the second state at the timing when the first and second game balls reach the first ball. Therefore, of two game balls (first game ball and second game ball), the number of game balls that may pass through the passage part is one, and the game that enters the entrance part. The number of spheres can be changed depending on the state of the entrance portion. Then, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) enters the ball-entry unit. This can be realized by a series of controls triggered by passing through the passage section.

Furthermore, according to the feature T5, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths triggered by the passage of the first game ball through the passage portion. The transition start waiting time when both the 1 game ball and the 2nd game ball) enter the entrance part is set (control when the first type electrification release is won in the tenth embodiment) (FIG. 87)) The transition start waiting time is set so that only the second game ball of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) will enter the entrance part. (Control in the case where the second type power release is won in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 89)). That is, according to the feature T5, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls that enter the entrance part, so it is possible to add inflection to the game, It is possible to improve the interest of games.
[Feature T6]
A gaming machine according to feature T5,
The distribution means includes
One game ball that has reached is distributed to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment), and
N game balls arrived after the game balls distributed to the first route (N is an integer of 2 or more) are distributed to the second route (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine configured to distribute one game ball that has arrived after N game balls distributed to the second route to the first route.

  According to the feature T6, one game ball is distributed to the first route and N game balls are distributed to the second route. Therefore, each of the (N + 1) game balls is entered. The control of whether or not to enter the part can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one game ball (first game ball) through the passage part. Furthermore, according to the feature T6, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths triggered by the passage of the first game ball through the passage portion. That is, according to the feature T6, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls that enter the entrance portion of the (N + 1) game balls. Inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature T7]
A gaming machine according to feature T6,
The second route is configured by N routes (route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The distribution means includes an alternating distribution mechanism (a first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and a second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) that alternately distributes game balls to any one of two paths. A gaming machine characterized by being configured in multiple stages.

  According to the feature T7, the function of distributing one game ball reached to the first route and distributing N game balls arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route is Compared to a configuration realized using control or the like, the configuration can be realized with a simple configuration. In addition, as a structure which implement | achieves the said function using electronic control etc., for example, a game ball using the structure etc. which measure the number of game balls which reached | attained using a counter etc. and are driven by an electric force The structure which distributes can be mentioned.

[Feature T8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T5 to T7,
Provided with a third path (path R2 in Example 1 and Example 4 in FIG. 84) configured such that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passage part;
The distribution means includes
One game ball that has arrived is distributed to the first route (route R11 in example 1 of FIG. 84, route R111 in example 4 of FIG. 84), and
At least one game ball among a plurality of game balls that arrives after the game balls distributed to the first route is designated as the second route (route R12 in example 1 in FIG. 84, route in example 4 in FIG. 84). R12 and route R112)
Distributing at least one game ball among a plurality of game balls reached after the game ball distributed to the first path to the third path;
The game balls distributed to the second route and one game ball reached after the game balls distributed to the third route are configured to be distributed to the first route,
The third path is configured such that the distributed game balls cannot enter the entrance portion even when the entrance portion is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature T8, since the distributed game sphere is provided with the third path configured so that it cannot enter the entrance portion, it is possible to further diversify the game. For example, if the configuration is such that a large number of game balls are distributed to the third route, the number of game balls entering the ball entrance portion can be reduced.

<Feature U group>
The feature U group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entry portion (second start port 208a (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball flowing in the game area can enter;
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. State transition means (opening / closing door 208b (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state which is a state;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A passage portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on a game ball passing through the passage section;
Display means for starting the variation display of the identification information based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage section, and terminating the variation display to stop and display the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means. (Usual unit 38),
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means;
With
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity is defined as a launch rate. If
The control means includes
A plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means;
Transition start waiting time from the start of the display by the display means to the start of the transition from the first state to the second state by the pitching unit (the universal unit in the eleventh embodiment) 38 variation time + opening / closing door 208b open standby time) to a different length for each control mode,
A first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is less than 1;
A second control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is 1,
A third control mode (the third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1;
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the characteristic U1, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the starting rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the starting rate is 1, and the starting rate is 1. Since the third control mode exceeding can be executed, an inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the feature U1, for example, even when the time during which the ball-entry unit maintains the second state (the opening time of the opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the three control modes described above can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
Alternating distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for alternately distributing the reached game balls to two paths;
A first route (route R1 in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing section;
With
The alternating distribution means includes
One game ball that has reached is distributed to the first route,
One game ball that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route,
One game ball that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first route and the second route are such that the distributed game balls can enter the entrance portion when the entrance portion is in the second state. Configured,
In a situation where game balls are continuously being fired by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity at predetermined intervals, the number of game balls that enter the pitching portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

  According to the feature U2, with a simple configuration using only one alternating distribution means, a first control mode in which the starting rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the starting rate is 1, It is possible to execute the third control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1. That is, since a mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, for example, by arranging other objects in the vacant game area.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to Feature U1 or Feature U2,
The control means includes
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) It is possible to set the length of the waiting time for opening) to a different length for each control mode.

  According to the feature U3, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the normal unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from the game ball passing through the passage until the lottery result is displayed by the display means. And the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b). The total waiting time). Therefore, according to the feature U3, when the game ball passes through the passage part and the time until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38) is set to the same length. Even when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the time (opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) from the time when the entrance portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state is different. By setting to, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal map unit + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to different lengths. That is, according to the feature U3, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b). Can be changed to change the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) and also change the number of game balls entering the entrance portion. Can do. As a result, it is possible to realize the first control mode in which the exit rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the exit rate is 1, and the third control mode in which the exit rate exceeds 1. It becomes possible.

<Feature V group>
The feature V group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature V1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entry part (second start port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. State transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state which is a state;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A lottery execution unit for the entrance part that executes the lottery for the entrance part based on the game ball entering the entrance part;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part, the display of the variation of the identification information is started, the end of the change display and the result of the entrance part lottery by the entrance part lottery execution means. A lottery result display means (special map unit 37) for stopping and displaying the corresponding identification information;
Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) for giving a privilege to the player based on the result of the lottery for the pitching part being a predetermined result (various jackpots);
Start means for starting a high probability lottery mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the result of the lottery for lottery becomes the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved;
Ending means for ending the high probability lottery mode;
A passage portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass;
Passing portion lottery execution means for executing a passing portion lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passing portion;
The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the passage lottery execution means after the variation display is ended while starting the variation display of the identification information based on the game ball passing through the passage portion A passing section lottery result display means (general unit 38) for stopping and displaying
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery for passing section by the lottery executing section for passage section, thereby causing the ball entering section to transition from the first state to the second state; ,
With
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity is defined as a launch rate. If
The control means includes
A plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means;
A first control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is less than 1;
A second control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is 1,
A third control mode (the third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1;
Is possible and
In the first control mode, the result of lottery for the pitching part is the first result (4R normal jackpot A in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 97)) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). And the number of the lottery for lottery executed after the start of the first control mode is equal to the result of the lottery for the pitched portion being the predetermined result (various jackpots). Without ending on the basis of reaching the specified number of times (100 times)
In the second control mode, the result of the lottery for the pitching section is the second result (8R probability variation jackpot (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). And starting based on that the result of the lottery for lottery executed after the start of the second control mode is the predetermined result (various jackpots),
In the third control mode, the result of the lottery for the pitching part is the third result (4R normal jackpot B in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 97)) among the predetermined results (various jackpots). And the number of the lottery for lottery executed after the third control mode is started is the result of the lottery for the pitched portion being the predetermined result (various jackpots). Without ending on the basis of reaching the specified number of times (100 times)
The high probability lottery mode is started based on the result of the lottery for lottery being the second result (8R probability variation big hit) among the predetermined results. It ends based on the result of the lottery for the entry ball part being the first result (4R normal jackpot A) or the third result (4R normal jackpot B) among the predetermined results. To play.

  According to the feature V1, if the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes the first result (4R normal jackpot A), the high-probability lottery mode is not started, but the first control mode (first high-frequency support mode) is set. Be started. When the first control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entrance part is promoted, so that the execution of the entrance part lottery is promoted. However, since the ball exit rate in the first control mode is less than 1, the number of game balls held by the player decreases. The first control mode is ended when the number of executions of the lottery for the pitching part reaches the specified number (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the pitching part becoming a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player wants to obtain a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the lottery for the entrance club before the number of executions of the lottery for the entrance club reaches the specified count and the first control mode ends. Play games while expecting. In addition, the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls on hand, and thus plays the game while expecting that a predetermined result (various jackpots) will be obtained in the early entry lottery as much as possible.

  Further, according to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the pitching portion becomes the second result (8R probability variation big hit), the high probability lottery mode is started and the second control mode (second high frequency support mode) ) Is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. In addition, when the second control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the ball entering part is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the ball entering part is promoted. Since the ball exit rate in the second control mode is 1, the number of game balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. The high probability lottery mode continues at least until the result of the lottery for lottery becomes a predetermined result (various jackpots). Further, the second control mode continues until the result of the lottery for lottery reaches a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player continues the high-probability lottery mode and the second control mode until a predetermined result (various jackpots) is obtained in the lottery for the pitching portion, so the result of the lottery for the pitching portion is the second result. The game is played with the expectation that the high probability lottery mode will continue (8R probability variation big hit). In addition, the player can concentrate his / her feelings on the type of the result when the result of the lottery for the pitched part becomes a predetermined result (various jackpots) because the number of game balls on hand does not increase or decrease.

  Furthermore, according to the feature V1, when the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes the third result (4R normal jackpot B), the high probability lottery mode is not started, but the third control mode (third high-frequency support mode) ) Is started. When the third control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the ball entering part is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the ball entering part is promoted. And since the ball-out rate in the third high-frequency support mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. The third control mode ends when the number of executions of the lottery for the pitching part reaches the specified number (100 times) without the result of the lottery for the pitching part becoming a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player ends the third control mode while continuing the third control mode to increase the number of game balls on hand until immediately before the number of executions for the pitching portion reaches the specified number. Until now, the game is performed with the expectation that the result of the lottery for the pitching club will be a predetermined result (various jackpots). Even if the result of the lottery for the pitching part does not become a predetermined result (various jackpots) before the number of executions of the lottery for the pitching part reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player Satisfaction can be obtained that the third control mode in which the number of game balls increases continues for the longest period.

  As described above, according to the feature V1, it is possible to create a new gameability that effectively uses the three control modes to give the player various expectations. be able to.

[Feature V2]
A gaming machine according to feature V1,
In the entrance part lottery result display means, the entrance part variation time setting means for setting the length of the entrance part variation time, which is the time for the identification information to be displayed in a variable manner,
The changing time setting means for the entrance part is
In a period during which the third control mode is being executed,
A gaming machine, wherein a longer time is set as the variation time for the pitching portion as the number of times of lottery for the pitching portion executed after the start of the third control mode is increased.

  According to the feature V2, the closer the number of executions for the entrance ball lottery to the specified number of times, the longer the entrance time variation time to be set, so the period during which the third control mode in which the game balls increase continues continues. It will be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of frustration of the player such that the result of the lottery for the pitching part does not become a predetermined result even though the number of times of the lottery for the pitching part is approaching the specified number.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
In the entrance part lottery result display means, the entrance part variation time setting means for setting the length of the entrance part variation time, which is the time for the identification information to be displayed in a variable manner,
The entrance club lottery execution means includes:
Even if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the pitching part is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if the predetermined condition (reach occurrence condition) is satisfied, the result of the condition satisfaction (rejected result (reach result (reach)) Occurrence)), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (displacement result (reach is not generated)),
The changing time setting means for the entrance part is
In a period during which the third control mode is being executed,
The length of the variation time for the pitching part corresponding to the lottery for the pitching part in which the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes the condition establishment result (outage result (reach occurrence)),
More than the length of the variation time for the pitching part corresponding to the lottery for the pitching part corresponding to the lottery for the pitching part in which the result of the lottery for the pitching part is the result that the condition is not satisfied (outage result (no reach occurrence)),
A gaming machine characterized by being set for a long time.

  According to the feature V3, when the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes a condition satisfaction result (disappearance result (reach occurrence)), compared to a case where a condition dissatisfaction result (disappearance result (no reach occurrence)) occurs. Also, a long variation time is set as the variation time for the entrance part. The greater the number of times that a long variation time is set as the variation time for the entrance portion, the longer the time required for the number of executions of the entrance portion lottery to reach the specified number. As a result, since the period during which the third control mode is continued increases, the period during which the player's hand-held game balls increase also increases. Therefore, as the number of times that the result of the lottery for the pitching club becomes the condition establishment result (outage result (reach occurrence)) can be created, a new gameability can be created in which the number of game balls increases. Can be planned.

[Feature V4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
The control means includes
A transition start waiting time from when the display means starts the change display until the pitching unit starts transition from the first state to the second state (in the eleventh embodiment, a normal unit 38 variation time + opening / closing door 208b open standby time) to a different length for each control mode,
The first control mode (the first high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
The second control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
The third control mode (the third high-frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the feature V4, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the starting rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the starting rate is 1, and the starting rate is 1. Since the third control mode exceeding can be executed, an inflection can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the feature V4, for example, even when the time during which the ball-entry unit maintains the second state (the opening time of the open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition occurs. If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the three control modes described above can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature V5]
A gaming machine according to feature V4,
Alternating distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for alternately distributing the reached game balls to two paths;
A first route (route R1 in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passing section;
With
The alternating distribution means includes
One game ball that has reached is distributed to the first route,
One game ball that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route,
One game ball that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first route and the second route are such that the distributed game balls can enter the entrance portion when the entrance portion is in the second state. Configured,
In a situation where game balls are continuously being fired by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity at predetermined intervals, the number of game balls that enter the pitching portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

  According to the feature V5, with a simple configuration using only one alternating distribution means, the first control mode in which the exit rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the exit rate is 1, It is possible to execute the third control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1. That is, since a mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, for example, by arranging other objects in the vacant game area.

[Feature V6]
The gaming machine according to feature V4 or feature V5,
The control means includes
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) It is possible to set the length of the waiting time for opening) to a different length for each control mode.

  According to the feature V6, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal unit 38 + opening waiting time of the open / close door 208b) is from the game ball passing through the passage until the lottery result is displayed by the display means. And the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b). The total waiting time). Therefore, according to the feature V6, when the game ball passes through the passage part and the time until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38) is set to the same length. Even when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the time (opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) from the time when the entrance portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state is different. By setting to, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal map unit + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to different lengths. That is, according to the feature V6, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display unit to when the pitching unit starts transition from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening the opening / closing door 208b) Can be changed to change the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) and also change the number of game balls entering the entrance portion. Can do. As a result, it is possible to realize the first control mode in which the exit rate is less than 1, the second control mode in which the exit rate is 1, and the third control mode in which the exit rate exceeds 1. It becomes possible.

<Feature W group>
The feature W group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entry part (second start port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. State transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state which is a state;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
A lottery execution unit for the entrance part that executes the lottery for the entrance part based on the game ball entering the entrance part;
Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance part, the display of the variation of the identification information is started, the end of the change display and the result of the entrance part lottery by the entrance part lottery execution means. A lottery result display means (special map unit 37) for stopping and displaying the corresponding identification information;
Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) for giving a privilege to the player based on the result of the lottery for the pitching part being a predetermined result (various jackpots);
Start means for starting a high probability lottery mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the result of the lottery for lottery becomes the predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved;
Ending means for ending the high probability lottery mode;
A passage portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass;
Passing portion lottery execution means for executing a passing portion lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passing portion;
The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the passage lottery execution means after the variation display is ended while starting the variation display of the identification information based on the game ball passing through the passage portion A passing section lottery result display means (general unit 38) for stopping and displaying
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery for passing section by the lottery executing section for passage section, thereby causing the ball entering section to transition from the first state to the second state; ,
With
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity is defined as a launch rate. If
The control means includes
A plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means;
The game ball non-increasing control mode (the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the pitch rate is 1 or less,
A game ball increase control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the pitch rate exceeds 1;
Is possible and
In the game ball non-increasing control mode, the result of the drawing part lottery is the first result (10R probability variation big hit A in the twelfth embodiment, 10R probability variation big hit B (FIG. 98)). )) And the number of times of the lottery for lottery executed after the game ball non-increasing control mode is started, the result of the lottery for lottery is the predetermined value. It ends based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without becoming a result (various jackpots)
In the gaming ball increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the pitching part is the second result (10R probability variation jackpot C in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 98)) of the predetermined results (various jackpots). And the number of the lottery for lottery executed after the game ball increase control mode is started, the result of the lottery for lottery is the predetermined result (various jackpots). Without ending on the basis of reaching the specified number of times (100 times)
The high-probability lottery mode is based on the result of the lottery for the pitching section being the first result (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B) or the second result (10R probability variation big hit C). The number of times of the lottery for the pitching part executed after the high-probability lottery mode is started is the specified number of times without the result of the lottery for the pitching part being the predetermined result (various jackpots). The game machine is ended based on reaching (100 times).

  According to the feature W1, when the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes the first result (10R probability variation big hit A or 10R probability variation big hit B), the high probability lottery mode is started and the game ball non-increasing control mode (first 1 high frequency support mode or 2nd high frequency support mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. In addition, when the game ball non-increasing control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the ball entering part is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the ball entering part is promoted. However, the game ball non-increasing control mode has a pitch rate of 1 or less, so the number of game balls held by the player does not increase. In the high-probability lottery mode and the non-increasing game ball control mode, the result of the lottery for the pitching part does not become a predetermined result (various jackpots), and the number of times the lottery for the pitching part is executed is a predetermined number (100 times). It ends when it reaches. Therefore, the player has a predetermined result (various jackpots) in the entrance club lottery as early as possible before the number of executions of the entrance club lottery reaches the specified number and the high probability lottery mode ends. Play games with the expectation that you want them to.

  Furthermore, according to the feature W1, when the result of the lottery for the pitching section becomes the second result (10R probability variation big hit C), the high probability lottery mode is started and the game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support) Mode) is started. When the high-probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. In addition, when the game ball increase control mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the ball entering part is promoted, so that the execution of the lottery for the ball entering part is promoted. Furthermore, since the ball-out rate in the game ball increase control mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. In the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode, the number of executions for the entrance club reaches the specified number (100 times) without the result of the entrance club lottery being a predetermined result (various jackpots). Then it ends. Therefore, the player can continue the game ball increase control mode and increase the number of hand-held game balls until the number of executions of the ball drawing lottery reaches the specified number of times, while the number of ball lottery executions is specified. The game is performed with the expectation that the result of the lottery for the pitching section will be a predetermined result (various jackpots) before the high-probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode are finished until the number of times is reached. Even if the result of the lottery for the pitching part does not become a predetermined result (various jackpots) before the number of executions of the lottery for the pitching part reaches the specified number of times (100 times), the player Satisfaction can be obtained that the game ball increase control mode in which the number of game balls increases continues for the longest period.

  As described above, according to the feature W1, it is possible to create a new gameability that gives the player various expectations during the period when the high-probability lottery mode limited to the specified number of times is being executed. It is possible to improve interest.

[Feature W2]
A gaming machine according to the feature W1,
In the entrance part lottery result display means, the entrance part variation time setting means for setting the length of the entrance part variation time, which is the time for the identification information to be displayed in a variable manner,
The changing time setting means for the entrance part is
In the period in which the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as the number of times of lottery for the pitching part executed after the game ball increasing control mode is started increases, a longer time is set as the variation time for the pitching part.

  According to the feature W2, the closer the number of executions for the entrance ball lottery to the specified number of times, the longer the change time for the entrance ball set, so the period during which the game ball increase control mode in which the game balls increase increases continues. It will be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of frustration of the player such that the result of the lottery for the pitching part does not become a predetermined result even though the number of times of the lottery for the pitching part is approaching the specified number.

[Feature W3]
A gaming machine according to the feature W1 or the feature W2,
In the entrance part lottery result display means, the entrance part variation time setting means for setting the length of the entrance part variation time, which is the time for the identification information to be displayed in a variable manner,
The entrance club lottery execution means includes:
Even if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the pitching part is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), if the predetermined condition (reach occurrence condition) is satisfied, the result of the condition satisfaction (rejected result (reach result (reach)) Occurrence)), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (displacement result (reach is not generated)),
The changing time setting means for the entrance part is
In the period in which the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
The length of the variation time for the pitching part corresponding to the lottery for the pitching part in which the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes the condition establishment result (outage result (reach occurrence)),
More than the length of the variation time for the pitching part corresponding to the lottery for the pitching part corresponding to the lottery for the pitching part in which the result of the lottery for the pitching part is the result that the condition is not satisfied (outage result (no reach occurrence)),
A gaming machine characterized by being set for a long time.

  According to the feature W3, when the result of the lottery for the pitching part becomes a condition establishment result (disappearance result (reach occurrence)), compared to a case where a condition dissatisfaction result (disappearance result (no reach occurrence)) occurs. Also, a long variation time is set as the variation time for the entrance part. The greater the number of times that a long variation time is set as the variation time for the entrance portion, the longer the time required for the number of executions of the entrance portion lottery to reach the specified number. As a result, the period during which the game ball increase control mode continues increases, and therefore the period during which the game balls held by the player increase also increases. Therefore, as the number of times that the result of the lottery for the pitching club becomes the condition establishment result (outage result (reach occurrence)) can be created, a new gameability can be created in which the number of game balls increases. Can be planned.

[Feature W4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3,
The control means includes
A transition start waiting time from when the display means starts the change display until the pitching unit starts transition from the first state to the second state (in the eleventh embodiment, a normal unit 38 variation time + opening / closing door 208b open standby time) to a different length for each control mode,
The gaming ball non-increasing control mode (first high frequency support mode, second high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment),
The game ball increase control mode (third high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the feature W4, by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to execute the game ball non-increasing control mode in which the ball-out rate is 1 or less and the game ball increase control mode in which the ball-out rate exceeds 1 Since it is possible, it is possible to add inflection to the game and improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature W4, for example, even when the time during which the ball-entry unit maintains the second state (the opening time of the open / close door 208b in the twelfth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition occurs. If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the two control modes described above can be executed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature W5]
A gaming machine according to feature W4,
Alternating distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately distributing the reached game balls to two paths;
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70)) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passage section;
With
The alternating distribution means includes
One game ball that has reached is distributed to the first route,
One game ball that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route,
One game ball that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first route and the second route are such that the distributed game balls can enter the entrance portion when the entrance portion is in the second state. Configured,
In a situation where game balls are continuously being fired by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity at predetermined intervals, the number of game balls that enter the pitching portion per predetermined time is set for each control mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that it varies depending on the length of the transition start waiting time.

  According to the feature W5, with a simple configuration using only one alternate allocating means, a game ball non-increasing control mode in which the starting rate is 1 or less, and a game ball increasing control mode in which the starting rate exceeds 1; Can be executed. That is, since the mechanism for executing the two control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, for example, by arranging other objects in the vacant game area.

[Feature W6]
A gaming machine according to feature W4 or feature W5,
The control means includes
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b in the twelfth embodiment) It is possible to set the length of the waiting time for opening) to a different length for each control mode.

  According to the feature W6, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38 + the opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) is from the game ball passing through the passage until the lottery result is displayed by the display means. And the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b). The total waiting time). Therefore, according to the feature W5, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage part until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (the fluctuation time of the normal map unit 38) is set to the same length. Even when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the time (opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) from the time when the entrance portion starts to transition from the first state to the second state is different. By setting to, the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal map unit + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) can be set to different lengths. That is, according to the feature W5, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means until the entrance portion starts transition from the first state to the second state (opening / closing door 208b waiting time). Can be changed to change the transition start waiting time (variation time of the normal unit 38 + opening waiting time of the opening / closing door 208b) and also change the number of game balls entering the entrance portion. Can do. As a result, it is possible to realize a game ball non-increasing control mode in which the exit rate is 1 or less and a game ball increase control mode in which the exit rate exceeds 1.

[Feature W7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W6,
The control means includes
As the game ball non-increasing mode (the first high-frequency support mode and the second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the pitch rate is 1 or less,
A game ball reduction control mode (first high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the pitching rate is less than 1;
A game ball maintenance control mode (second high-frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the pitch rate is 1;
A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.

  According to the feature W7, when the game ball reduction control mode is started, the entrance of the game ball to the entrance part is promoted, so that the execution of the entrance part lottery is promoted. However, the game ball reduction rate in the game ball reduction control mode is less than 1, so the number of game balls held by the player decreases. Therefore, the player wants to minimize the decrease of the hand-held game ball, and thus plays the game with the expectation that a predetermined result (various jackpots) will be obtained in the entrance ball lottery as early as possible. Thus, according to the feature W7, various expectations can be given to the player, so that the interest of the game ball can be improved.

<Feature X group>
The feature X group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81);
A ball entry part (second start port 208a in the eleventh embodiment) into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. State transition means (opening / closing door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning between the second state which is a state;
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out a game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the ball entry section;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the entrance portion;
A lottery execution unit for the entrance part that executes the lottery for the entrance part based on the acquired special information;
The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for lottery by the lottery execution unit for the pitching part after the variation display is finished after starting the variation display of the identification information based on the execution of the lottery for the pitching part A lottery result display means (special map unit 37) for stopping and displaying
Incoming part variation time setting means for setting the length of the inflection part variation time (the variation time of the special figure unit 37), which is the time in which the identification information is variably displayed in the intrusion part lottery result display means
A passage portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which a game ball circulating in the game area can pass;
Passing portion lottery execution means for executing a passing portion lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passing portion;
The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the passage lottery execution means after the variation display is ended while starting the variation display of the identification information based on the game ball passing through the passage portion A passing section lottery result display means (general unit 38) for stopping and displaying
After the passage portion variation time length (the variation time of the normal unit 38), which is the time for which the identification information is variably displayed in the passage portion lottery result display means, is set, and after the passage portion variation time has elapsed Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery for passing section by the lottery executing section for passage section, thereby causing the ball entering section to transition from the first state to the second state. When,
Entry part variation time table (special figure unit table A in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)) in which the length of the entry part change time is stored in correspondence with the number of executions of the entry part lottery ), And a passing portion variation time table in which the length of the passage portion variation time is stored corresponding to the number of executions of the pitching portion lottery (the table unit table A in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)). ))) As a set of tables (variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102));
With
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity is defined as a launch rate. If
The control means includes
A plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means can be executed,
By setting the length of the variation time for the passing portion to a different length for each control mode,
A first control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 99 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is less than 1;
A second control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 100 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is 1.
A third control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 101 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1.
At least two of the control aspects can be implemented;
When the pitch variation time setting means sets the length of the pitch variation time with reference to the pitch variation time table,
The gaming machine characterized in that the length of the passing portion variation time is set with reference to the passing portion variation time table and the passage portion variation time table stored as a set of tables.

  According to the feature X1, by setting the length of the passing portion variation time (variation time of the normal map unit 38) to a different length for each control mode, the first control in which the exit rate is less than 1 Since at least two control modes of the mode, the second control mode in which the ball-out rate is 1 and the third control mode in which the ball-out rate exceeds 1 can be executed. It is possible to improve interest.

  Furthermore, according to the feature X1, the length of the passing portion variation time and the length of the entering portion variation time are set based on the number of times of entering the lottery portion (game times). Then, the exit rate changes according to the set length of the passing portion variation time. That is, the percentage of game balls that enter the entrance part changes. Therefore, if the length of the variation time for the entrance portion suitable for the proportion of the game balls entering the entrance portion is stored in advance in the entry portion variation time table, the entrance portion lottery (game times) It is possible to set a variation time for entry that is suitable for the proportion of the game balls entering the entry portion that changes based on the number of executions.

[Feature X2]
A gaming machine according to feature X1,
A holding storage means for holding the special information acquired from the start of the variable information identification display display to the end of the stop display by the entrance lottery result display means up to a prescribed number,
In the ball changing time table (special unit table A (FIG. 102) in the thirteenth embodiment), when the length of the passing portion changing time is set, the ball enters the ball entering portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a variation time longer than an interval between game balls to be played is stored.

  According to the feature X2, since the special information can always be stored in the holding storage unit, it is possible to realize a state in which the lottery for the ball-entry unit is continuously executed without interruption.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
The table storage means stores a plurality of the table groups (variable time table sets A and B in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)),
The control means switches the table group to be referred to when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when winning a small hit).

  According to the feature X3, the table group to be referred to is switched, so that it is possible to change the variation time for the entry portion, the change time for the passage portion, and the exit rate set based on the number of executions of the entry portion lottery. . Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature X4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X3,
Alternating distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately distributing the reached game balls to two paths;
A first route (route R1 (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed game balls to pass through the passing portion;
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70)) configured so that the distributed game balls cannot pass through the passage section;
With
The alternating distribution means includes
One game ball that has reached is distributed to the first route,
One game ball that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the first route is distributed to the second route,
One game ball that has arrived after the game ball distributed to the second route is configured to be distributed to the first route,
The first route and the second route are such that the distributed game balls can enter the entrance portion when the entrance portion is in the second state. Configured,
In a situation where game balls are continuously being fired by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity at predetermined intervals, the number of game balls that enter the pitching portion per predetermined time is the variation time for the passing portion. A gaming machine characterized by different lengths.

  According to the feature X4, with a simple configuration using only one alternating distribution means, a first control mode in which the starting rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the starting rate is 1, It is possible to execute the third control mode in which the exit rate exceeds 1. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, the game area can be effectively utilized, for example, by arranging another accessory in the vacant game area.

  Note that the inventions of the above-described feature group A to feature group X solve the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have been improved from various viewpoints such as structure and performance in order to improve the fun of the game.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further technical improvement is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko machine: Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player, and a start entrance ball that is provided in the game area and can enter a game ball flowing down the game area And information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball entering the starting entrance part,
A gaming machine comprising acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the starting entrance section.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be realized with various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and the modifications corresponding to the technical features in each embodiment described in the summary section of the invention are to solve some or all of the above-described problems, or In order to achieve part or all of the effects, replacement or combination can be performed as appropriate. Further, if the technical feature is not described as essential in the present specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Production operation button 25 ... Operation handle 30 ... Game board 31 ... guide rail 31a ... inner rail part 31b ... outer rail part 32 ... general winning opening 33 ... first starting port 34 ... second starting port 34a ... electric Accessory 34b ... Electric accessory drive unit 35 ... Thru gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special Figure unit 37a ... first result display part 37b ... second result display part 37c ... first hold display part 37d ... second hold display part 38 ... general map unit 39 ... round Display unit 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Symbol display device 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 45 ... Main display 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 51 .. First control unit 52 ... Second control unit 53 ... Third control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main controller 61 ... Main Control board 62 ... Main MPU
63 ... Main ROM
63a ... Attack table storage area 63b ... Distribution table storage area 63c ... Reach determination table storage area 63d ... Display duration table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command information storage area 64 ... Main side RAM
64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Reserved ball storage area 64b ... Holding information storage area 64c ... Telephone service holding area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 67a .. . Various detection sensors 70 ... Discharge control device 71 ... Discharge device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Voice Light emission control device 91 ... Sound light emission control board 92 ... Sound light side MPU
93 ... Sound ROM
93a ... Holding confirmation table storage area 93b ... Present notice advance notice table storage area 93c ... Present notice advance notice effect table storage area 93d ... Present notice notice stop symbol table storage area 93e ... Fluctuation display pattern table storage area 94 ... Sound side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 94d ... Preliminary notice advance notice storage area 100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
105 ... VDP
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
200 ... second starter unit 202 ... opening 204 ... alternate distribution mechanism 204a ... center piece 204b ... left piece 204c ... right piece 204d ... rotary shaft 204e ... Left side holding part 204f ... Right side holding part 206 ... Through gate 208 ... Opening / closing entrance device 208a ... Second start opening 208b ... Opening / closing door 208c ... Trainway 300. ..Second starter unit 300B ... second starter unit 300C ... second starter unit 300D ... second starter unit 300E ... second starter unit 300F ... second starter Mouth unit 302 ... Opening 304 ... Alternate distribution mechanism (first alternating distribution mechanism)
304a ... Center piece 304b ... Left piece 304c ... Right piece 304d ... Rotating shaft 304e ... Left holder 304f ... Right holder 305 ... Second alternating distribution Mechanism 305A ... Third alternating sorting mechanism 305a ... Central piece 305b ... Left piece 305c ... Right piece 305d ... Rotating shaft 305e ... Left holding part 305f ... Right Holding part 306 ... Through gate 308 ... Opening / closing entrance device 308a ... Second start opening 308b ... Opening / closing door 308c ... Train

Claims (3)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A ball-entry unit into which a game ball that circulates in the game area can enter;
As for the state of the entrance part, the first state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entrance part, and the entrance of the game ball into the entrance part is possible or easy. State transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state;
A payout means for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball entering the entrance portion;
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the entrance portion;
A lottery execution unit for the entrance part that executes the lottery for the entrance part based on the acquired special information;
The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for lottery by the lottery execution unit for the pitching part after the variation display is finished after starting the variation display of the identification information based on the execution of the lottery for the pitching part A lottery result display means for stopping the game,
A variation time setting means for entering the ball part for setting the length of the variation time for the ball part which is the time for the identification information to be displayed in a variable manner in the lottery result display means for the ball part,
A passing part through which game balls circulating in the game area can pass;
Passing portion lottery execution means for executing a passing portion lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the passing portion;
The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the passing portion by the passage lottery execution means after the variation display is ended while starting the variation display of the identification information based on the game ball passing through the passage portion Passing section lottery result display means for stopping and displaying,
By setting the length of the passing portion variation time, which is the time for the identification information to be variably displayed in the passage portion lottery result display means, and after the passage portion variation time has elapsed, the passage portion lottery execution means Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the passing section lottery, thereby causing the ball entering section to transition from the first state to the second state;
A variation time table for a pitching portion in which the length of the variation time for the pitching portion is stored corresponding to the number of times of the lottery for pitching portion, and the number of times of performing the lottery for the pitching portion A table storage means for storing a passage time variation time table in which the length of the passage time variation is stored, as a set of tables;
With
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined interval by the launching means at a predetermined launch intensity is defined as a launch rate. If
The control means includes
A plurality of types of control modes for controlling the state transition means can be executed,
By setting the length of the variation time for the passing portion to a different length for each control mode,
A first control mode in which the exit rate is less than 1,
A second control mode in which the ball exit rate is 1,
A third control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1;
At least two of the control aspects can be implemented;
When the pitch variation time setting means sets the length of the pitch variation time with reference to the pitch variation time table,
The gaming machine characterized in that the length of the passing portion variation time is set with reference to the passing portion variation time table and the passage portion variation time table stored as a set of tables. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A holding storage means for holding the special information acquired from the start of the variable information identification display display to the end of the stop display by the entrance lottery result display means up to a prescribed number,
In the pitch variation time table, a variation time longer than an interval between game balls that enter the pitch portion when the length of the passage variation time is set is stored. A gaming machine characterized by A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The table storage means stores a plurality of the table groups,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the control means switches the table group to be referred to when a predetermined condition is satisfied.